Owner`s manual | Chrysler 2004 Sebring Sedan Automobile User Manual

SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
䡵 Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
䡵 Vehicle Modifications / Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . 7
䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1
4
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your dealer
knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained technicians and genuine Mopar威 parts, and is interested in
your satisfaction.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the table of contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this owner’s manual:
INTRODUCTION
5
1
6
INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures which could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire manual you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears on the Automobile Information
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle.
Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle
identification number and optional equipment.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN plate.
INTRODUCTION
7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS / ALTERATIONS
1
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle
could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety
and may lead to an accident resulting in serious
injury or death.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ Child Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
䡵 Sentry Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
䡵 Illuminated Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ To Program Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ To Open/Close Power Liftgate — If Equipped . .22
10
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Turn Off “Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock” . . .23
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
䡵 Vehicle Theft Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
䡵 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .39
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .42
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
▫ Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .67
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
You can insert the double sided keys into the locks with
either side up.
11
be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer. Ask
your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe
place.
Ignition Key Removal
The shift lever must be in PARK. Turn the key to the
LOCK position, then remove the key.
Vehicle Key
The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can
Ignition Key Positions
2
12
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The power window switches, radio, power
sunroof, and power outlets will remain active for up to 45
seconds after the ignition switch has been turned off.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
WARNING!
Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could
be injured. Children should be warned not to touch
the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector
lever. Don’t leave the keys in the ignition. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
If you open the driver’s door and the key is in the ignition
switch, a chime will sound to remind you to remove the
key.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized operation of the vehicle by disabling the engine.
The system will shut the engine off after 2 seconds of
running if an invalid key is used to start the vehicle. This
system utilizes ignition keys which have an electronic
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
chip (transponder) embedded into them. Only keys that
have been programmed to the vehicle can be used to start
and operate the vehicle.
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System does not need to be
armed or activated. Operation of the system is automatic
regardless of whether or not the vehicle is locked or
unlocked. During normal operation, the Theft Alarm/
Immobilizer Light will come on for three (3) seconds
immediately after the ignition switch is turned on for a
bulb check. Afterwards, if the bulb remains on, this
indicates a problem with the electronics.
If the bulb begins to flash after the bulb check, this
indicates that an invalid key has been used to start the
vehicle. Both of these conditions will result in the engine
being shut off after two (2) seconds of running.
Keep in mind that a key which has not been programmed
is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the
ignition lock cylinder for that vehicle.
13
If the Theft Alarm/Immobilizer Light comes on during
normal vehicle operation (vehicle has been running for
longer than 10 seconds), a fault has been detected in the
electronics and the vehicle should be serviced as soon as
possible.
NOTE:
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible
with remote starting systems. Use of these systems
may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
• Exxon/Mobil Speed Pass,™ additional Sentry Keys, or
any other transponder equipped components on the
same keychain will not cause a key-related (transponder) fault unless the additional part is physically held
against the ignition key being used when starting the
vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or other RF electronics
will not cause interference with this system.
2
14
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it can
not be programmed to any other vehicle.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four digit PIN number. This number is required
for dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may
be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the
Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure
consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key is one which has never been
programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to the
dealer.
Customer Key Programming
You can program new sentry keys to the system if you
have two valid sentry keys by performing the following
procedure:
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank(s) to
match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no
longer than 15 seconds. Turn the ignition switch OFF and
remove the first key.
3. Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition
switch ON within 15 seconds. After ten seconds a chime
will sound and the Theft Alarm Light will begin to flash.
Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
15
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds. After 10
seconds a single chime will sound. The Theft Alarm Light
will stop flashing, turn on for 3 seconds; then turn off.
General Information
The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
The new Sentry Key has been programmed. The Keyless
Entry Transmitter will also be programmed during this
procedure.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
Repeat this procedure to program up to a total of 8 keys.
If you do not have a programmed sentry key, contact
your dealer for details.
NOTE: If a programmed key has been lost, see your
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the systems memory. The remaining keys must then reprogrammed. This will prevent the lost key from starting
your vehicle. All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer
at the time of service to be reprogrammed.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the keyless
entry transmitter or open the doors.
The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they
will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is
turned on.
NOTE: The overhead console, door courtesy, liftgate
and reading lights will not operate if the dimmer control
is in the “defeat” position (extreme downward position).
2
16
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
Lock the doors by pushing up on the lock knob on each
door trim panel.
If the lock knob is up when you shut the door, the door
will lock. Therefore, make sure the keys are not inside the
vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death.
Door Lock Plunger
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
17
locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing the key
or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A
chime will sound if the key is in the ignition and a door
is open, as a reminder to remove the key.
Auto Door Locks — If Equipped
The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power
door locks if:
1. The Auto Lock feature is enabled,
2. The transmission is in gear,
3. all doors are closed,
4. the vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h) and
Power Door Lock Switch
If you press the power door lock switch while the key is
in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power
5. the doors were not previously locked using the power
door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter.
The Automatic Door Locks can be enabled or disabled by
performing the following procedure:
2
18
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition
switch.
2. Cycle the ignition switch ON/OFF four times ending
in the OFF position. (do not start the engine)
3. Within 10 seconds of the final cycle, press the interior
driver’s door lock switch to the LOCK position.
4. A single chime will sound to signify that you have
successfully completed the programming.
You can turn the feature back on by repeating the above
mentioned procedure or by performing the procedure in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), Customer Programmable Features section on vehicles so
equipped.
Auto Unlock On Exit— If Equipped
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Auto Unlock feature is enabled,
2. the transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h),
3. the transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK,
4. the driver door is opened (excluding liftgate),
5. the doors were not previously unlocked and
6. the vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
The Automatic Door Locks can be enabled or disabled by
performing the following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition
switch.
2. Cycle the ignition switch ON/OFF four times ending
in the OFF position. (do not start the engine)
3. Within 10 seconds of the final cycle, press the interior
driver’s door lock switch to the UNLOCK position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. A single chime will sound to signify that you have
successfully completed the programming.
The Auto Unlock On Exit feature is enabled when your
vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant and can be
enabled or disabled by performing the procedure in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), Customer
Programmable Features section or by repeating the above
mentioned procedure.
NOTE: Use the Auto Door Locks and Auto Unlock
features in accordance with local laws.
19
Child Protection Door Lock
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a child
protection door lock system.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
2
20
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To activate the system, open the rear door and move the
child lock control, located near the door’s rear latch, to
the ON position.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate, and activate the panic alarm from distances up to
about 23 feet (7 meters) using a hand held radio transmitter. The transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicle
to activate the system.
NOTE: If the key is in the ignition switch, then all
buttons on that transmitter will be disabled. The buttons
on the remaining transmitters will work. If the vehicle is
shifted out of PARK, all the transmitter buttons are
disabled for all keys.
Child Lock Control
When the child lock system is engaged the door can be
opened only by using the outside door handle even
though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
21
NOTE: If desired, the “Remote Unlock Driver’s Door
1st” feature can be turned on and off by referring to the
Customer Programmable Features of the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” section or by following
these steps.
1. Press the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds.
2. While the UNLOCK button is pressed, (after 4 seconds) press the LOCK button. Release both buttons.
The “Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st” feature can be
reactivated by repeating this procedure.
Keyless Entry Transmitter
To unlock the doors and liftgate:
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter
once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice to unlock all
doors and liftgate. The illuminated entry system also
turns on.
To lock the doors and liftgate:
Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to
lock all doors and liftgate. The horn will chirp once to
acknowledge the signal. If desired, the “Sound Horn On
Lock” feature can be turned on and off by referring to the
2
22
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Customer Programmable Features of the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” section or by following
these steps.
1. Press the LOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds.
2. While the LOCK button is pressed (after 4 seconds),
press the PANIC button. Release both buttons.
The “Sound Horn On Lock” feature can be reactivated by
repeating this procedure.
Using The Panic Alarm:
To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the panic alarm is on, the
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off and the interior lights will turn on.
The panic alarm will stay on for 3 minutes unless you
turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or
turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
NOTE: When you turn off the panic alarm by pressing
the PANIC button a second time, you may have to be
closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of
the system.
To Program Transmitters:
Refer to SENTRY KEY “Customer Key Programming.”
If you do not have a programmed transmitter, contact
your dealer for details.
To Open/Close Power Liftgate — If Equipped
Press the LIFTGATE button twice within five seconds to
open/close the power liftgate. The liftgate will beep for 2
seconds and then open/close. If the button is pushed
while the liftgate is being power closed, the liftgate will
reverse to the full open position.
If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with a
powered liftgate, pressing the button will result in the
liftgate becoming unlocked for 30 seconds allowing you
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
to manually access the liftgate area. The liftgate will
re-lock automatically within 10 seconds once the liftgate
is closed.
To Turn Off “Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock”
NOTE: If desired, the “Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock”
feature can be turned on and off by referring to the
Customer Programmable Features of the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” section or by following
these steps.
1. Press the LOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds.
2. While the LOCK button is pressed, (after 4 seconds)
press the UNLOCK button. Release both buttons.
The “Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock” feature can be
reactivated by repeating this procedure. The table below
explains the Lamp Flash options.
Function
Lock
Unlock 1st
Press
Unlock All
Doors
Liftgate
Which Turn Signal
Lamps
All
Driver’s Side
Number of
Flashes
1
2
All
2
All
2
23
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
2
24
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If your Remote Keyless Entry transmitter fails to operate
from a normal distance, check for these two conditions.
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
Transmitter Battery Service
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE: Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
the back housing or the printed circuit board.
1. With the transmitter buttons facing down, use a small
screwdriver or similar flat object to pry the two halves of
the transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
rubber gasket during removal.
Separating Transmitter Halves
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. To reassemble the transmitter case, snap the two
halves together. Make sure there is an even “gap” between the two halves. Test transmitter operation.
VEHICLE THEFT ALARM
This system monitors the vehicle doors and ignition
switch for unauthorized entry or operation. When the
alarm is activated, the system provides both audible and
visual signals. The horn will pulse, headlights/park
lights will flash, the Vehicle Theft Alarm/Immobilizer
light, located above the driver’s center instrument panel
vent will flash, and the vehicle will not start. If the alarm
is triggered and no action is taken to disarm it, the system
will turn off the horn after three minutes and after 15
minutes of light only operation the system will then
rearm itself.
25
To arm the system: Remove the key from the ignition
switch and either:
1. Press a power door lock switch while the driver’s or
passenger’s door is open.
2. Press the LOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter.
After the last door is closed, or if all doors are closed, the
system will arm itself in about 16 seconds. During that
time, the Vehicle Theft Alarm/Immobilizer light will
flash. If it does not illuminate, the system is not arming.
If you open a door during this arming period, the system
will cancel the arming process. You must repeat one of
the previously described arming sequences to rearm the
system.
2
26
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To disarm the system: Press the UNLOCK button on the
keyless entry transmitter. Also, using a valid sentry key
and moving the ignition switch to the ON/START position will disarm the system. If you disarm the system and
access the liftgate area, the system must be rearmed, as
described previously, when closing the liftgate. If something has triggered the system in your absence, the horn
will sound three times when you disarm the system.
Check the vehicle for tampering.
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
on the keyless entry transmitter cannot arm or disarm
the system.
• Once the alarm is set, and the liftgate button on the
keyless entry transmitter is pressed, on a non-power
liftgate vehicle, you have a 30 second one time access
into the liftgate area. If the liftgate is not opened within
30 seconds the liftgate will automatically re-lock
within 10 seconds.
• The system remains armed during liftgate entry, pressing the liftgate button will not disarm the system, if
someone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and
opens any door the alarm will sound.
• When the system is armed, the doors can not be
unlocked from the interior power door lock switches.
The Vehicle Theft Alarm system is designed to protect
your vehicle, however, you can create conditions where
the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the
previously described arming sequences has occurred, the
system will arm regardless of whether you are in the
vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
system.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
27
The alarm system will be activated when the battery is
connected if the system was previously armed. The
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound, and the
ignition will not start the vehicle. If this occurs, disarm
the system.
2
LIFTGATE
The liftgate can be unlocked using the remote keyless
entry or by activating the power door lock switches
located on the front doors.
Once unlocked, the liftgate can be opened or closed. To
open the liftgate, depress the liftgate release switch
located in the exterior handle and pull the liftgate open
with one fluid motion.
Liftgate Release Switch
The liftgate will not manually open if the vehicle is in
gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).
28
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an
emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open
the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be
accessed through a snap-in cover located on the liftgate trim panel.
liftgate is fully open, pressing the button twice within
five seconds a second time will close the liftgate.
The power liftgate may also be opened by pressing the
switch located on the overhead console.
• If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with a
powered liftgate, pressing the button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter will result in the liftgate
becoming unlocked for 30 seconds allowing you to
manually access the liftgate area. The liftgate will
re-lock automatically within 10 seconds once the liftgate is closed.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened manually or by using
the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter. Press
the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter twice
within five seconds, to open the power liftgate. Once the
Power Liftgate Switch
A beeping signal will sound two seconds before the
liftgate starts to open or close.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
NOTE:
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips
will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
29
• The power liftgate must be in the full open position for
any of the close buttons to operate. If the liftgate is not
fully open, press the open button to fully open the
liftgate and then press close.
• If the liftgate release switch is activated while the
power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the
full open position.
• The power liftgate switches will not operate if the
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
(0 km/h).
• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
below ⫺22° F (⫺30° C) or temperatures above 150° F
(65° C). Be sure to remove any build-up of snow or ice
from the liftgate before pressing any of the power
liftgate switches.
2
30
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop and must be opened or closed manually.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
door windows.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
31
When the lock switch is pressed the window controls on
the passenger doors will not illuminate and the passenger windows will be disabled.
Auto Down Feature
All the power window switches have an auto down
feature. Press the window switch to the second detent,
release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
Power Window Switches
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
switch is in the ON or ACCESSORY position.
The window lock switch on the driver’s door allows you
to disable the window controls on the passenger doors.
The power window switches remain active for up to 45
seconds after the ignition switch has been turned off.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
2
32
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front
airbags for both the driver and front passenger, and if
equipped, left and right window bags for the driver and
passengers seated next to a window and a driver inflatable knee blocker. If you will be carrying children too
small for adult-size seat belts, your seat belts or the
LATCH feature (refer to the Child Restraint section in this
manual), can be used to hold infant and child restraint
systems.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Occupant Classification System (OCS) there will be a Passenger Airbag
Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light located on the center of
the instrument panel.
Passenger Airbag Disabled Light
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The front airbags have a multi stage inflator
design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of
inflation that are based on collision severity.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
33
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All the seats in your vehicle are equipped with Lap/
Shoulder Belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
2
34
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock
and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the
best.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep
your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
35
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2
2. The seat belt latch plate is near the seatback of the
front seats and next to your arm in the rear seats. Grasp
the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go
around your lap.
Latch Plate
36
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click”.
Latch Plate To Buckle
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too
high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries.
Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In
a sudden stop you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle
in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt
worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs
aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over
your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the
force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more likely
to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be
used together.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
37
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it
to your dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Removing Slack From Belt
2
38
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seats, the shoulder belt anchorage can be
adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt
away from your neck. Press the button to release the
anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position
that serves you best.
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
39
2
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
Positioning Latch Plate
40
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing 180° to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
Sliding The Latch Plate
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Creating A Fold
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices improve the performance of the seat belt
by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early
in a collision. Pretensioners are designed to work for all
size occupants.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the front airbag control module (see Airbag Section). Like the front airbags,
the pretensioners are single use items. After a collision
that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners, both must be replaced.
41
Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within 60
seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning
System (BeltAlert) will alert the driver to buckle their seat
belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to
buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will continue to
chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96
seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will be reactivated if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than
10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8
km/h).
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by
following these steps:
2
42
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or RUN position. DaimlerChrysler does not recommend
deactivating the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert).
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
buckle the driver’s seat belt.
4. Turn off the engine. A single chime will sound to
signify that you have successfully completed the programming.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
2. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position (engine
does not need to be running), and wait for the Seat Belt
Warning Light to turn off.
NOTE: Although the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert) has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning
Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s seat
belt remains unbuckled.
3. Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, unbuckle
and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt at least three
times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt
buckled.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on
while unbuckling and off while re-buckling the seat belt.
It may be necessary to retract the seat belt.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your dealer can
provide you with a seat belt extender. This extender
should be used only if the existing belt is not long
enough. When it is not required, remove the extender
and stow it.
43
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
2
44
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System - Airbag
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front
passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag
is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on
the airbag covers.
Front Airbag Components
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment in low
speed collisions.
The front airbags have a multi stage inflator design. This
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity and occupant size.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
45
Also, the front passenger airbag is certified to the Federal
regulations that define Occupant Classification (Refer to
“Occupant Classification System” in this section).
2
This vehicle may also be equipped with a driver inflatable knee blocker located on the instrument panel below
the steering column.
This vehicle may also be equipped with left and right
window bags to protect the driver and passengers sitting
next to a window. If the vehicle is equipped with window
bags, they are located above the side windows. Their
covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
Side Airbag Location
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
46
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers
or attempt to manually open them. You may damage
the airbags and you could be injured because the
airbags are not there to protect you. These protective
covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open
only when the airbags are inflating.
• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
window bags, do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the side curtain
airbag. The area where the side curtain airbag is
located should remain free from any obstructions.
• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
window bags, do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof, including adding a
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Along with seat belts, and pretensioners, front airbags
work with the instrument panel knee blockers to provide
improved protection for the driver and front passenger.
Left and right window bags also work with seat belts to
improve occupant protection.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions.
NOTE: The passenger front airbag may not deploy even
when the driver front airbag has if the Occupant Classification System (refer to “Occupant Classification System” in this section) has determined the seat is empty or
is occupied by a child.
If your vehicle is equipped, the window bag on the crash
side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side
collisions. But even in collisions where the airbags inflate,
you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position
for the airbags to protect you properly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag.
An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to
infants in that position.
Children that are not big enough to properly wear the
vehicle seat belt (refer to section on Child Restraint)
should be secured in the rear seat, in a child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat appropriate for the size and
age of the child. Older children who do not use a child
restraint or belt-positioning booster seat should ride
properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their
arm.
47
If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child
restraint. Refer to the section on Child Restraint.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should wear their lap and shoulder
belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags
room to inflate.
4. If your vehicle has left and right window bags, do
not lean against the door, airbags will inflate forcefully
into the space between you and the door.
2
48
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you
have airbags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front airbag deployment could
cause serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate.
Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to
reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
• If the vehicle has left and right window bags, they
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
“The Airbag System” consists of the following:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• AIRBAG Readiness Light
• Driver Airbag
• Front Passenger Airbag
• Window Bags above Side Windows — If Equipped
• Front Impact Sensors
• Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Seat Belt Readiness Light
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Interconnecting Wiring
• Knee Impact Bolster
• Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker
• Front Passenger Seat Occupant Classification System
(OCS)
49
severity, the front control module determines the
proper rate of inflation. The front airbag inflators are
designed to provide different rates of airbag inflation.
• The ORC may modify the rate of inflation based on the
occupant size provided by the Occupant Classification
Module.
− Occupant Classification Module
• The ORC will not detect side, roll over, or rear impacts.
− Passenger Airbag Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light
• The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts
of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or RUN positions. These include all of the
items listed above except the steering wheel and
column, instrument panel and passenger knee bolsters. If the key is in the OFF position, in the ACC
position, or not in the ignition, the airbags are not on
and will not inflate.
− Interconnecting Wiring
− Bladder Assembly
− Belt Tension Sensor
How The Airbag System Works
• The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the
airbags to inflate. Based on the level of collision
2
50
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Also, the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warning
light and PAD indicator light in the center of
the instrument panel for 6 to 8 seconds for a
self-check when the ignition is first turned on.
After the self-check, the AIRBAG warning light will turn
off. The PAD indicator light will function normally (Refer
to “Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light” in
this section). If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part
of the system, it turns on the AIRBAG warning light
either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
sound if the light comes on again after initial start up.
WARNING!
Ignoring the AIRBAG warning light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the airbags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not
come on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have the airbag system
checked right away.
• The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC and
impact sensors detects a collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags.
Different airbag inflation rates may be possible based
on collision severity and occupant size. The steering
wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the
instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the airbags inflate to their full size. The airbags fully
inflate in about 50–70 milliseconds. This is about half
of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The airbags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger.
The driver’s and passenger’s front airbag gas is vented
through the airbag material towards the instrument
panel. In this way the airbags do not interfere with
your control of the vehicle.
• The Side Impact SRS Window Bags are designed to
activate only in certain side collisions. When the ORC
and the side impact sensors (with side impact option)
detects a collision requiring the window bags to
inflate, it signals the inflators on the crash side of the
vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the window bag. The inflating window bag
pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the
way and covers the window. The airbag inflates in
51
about 30 milliseconds (about one quarter of the time it
takes to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure
you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the window bag
inflates. This especially applies to children. The window bag is only about 31⁄2 inches (9 cm) thick when it
is inflated.
• When the ORC and the impact sensors detect a
collision requiring the Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker
, it signals the inflator unit. A quantity of nontoxic gas
is generated to inflate the Driver Inflatable Knee
Blocker. The Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker inflates
rearward towards the driver’s knees to help protect
the knees and position you for the best interaction
with the front airbag. The Driver Inflatable Knee
Blocker fully inflates in about 50 milliseconds, this is
only about half of the time it takes you to blink your
eyes. It then quickly deflates while helping to protect
the driver’s knees.
2
52
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees, and
position everyone for the best interaction with the
front airbag.
• If your vehicle contains a Passenger Airbag Disable
indicator light, it will be equipped with the Occupant
Classification System (OCS). The OCS system will
classify an occupant into a size category based on
sensor readings from within the seat cushion. Occupants should try to remain in a normally seated
position. If the occupant’s weight is transferred to
another object in the vehicle (i.e. feet on the dashboard), the OCS may not be able to properly approximate occupant size. Furthermore, the occupant size
may appear to increase or decrease due to objects
hanging on the seat, other passengers pushing on the
seat, or objects lodged underneath the seat.
If there is a rapid change in temperature or humidity,
the OCS may not be able to properly approximate
occupant size. If your seat including your trim cover
and cushion needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer.
Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used.
If there is a fault present in the system, the AIRBAG
warning light will illuminate indicating that you should
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. In the presence
of an occupant in the passenger seat, if both the PAD
indicator light and AIRBAG warning light are illuminated the airbag will be disabled.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The ORC will not allow front airbag deployment in the
event of a collision for occupants classified into the
empty or child size categories. The PAD indicator light
will illuminate indicating that the Passenger Airbag is
OFF when the OCS has determined that the occupant size
category is a child. Also, when the seat is empty or an
object that weighs less than a predetermined threshold is
placed on the seat, the light will remain OFF. (The PAD
indicator light is an amber light located on the center of
the instrument panel above the climate controls.)
53
2
Passenger Airbag Disabled Light
54
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
For almost all sizes of properly seated adults, the airbag
will be enabled in the event of a collision. For small
teenagers and some small adults, depending on size, the
airbag may or may not be enabled in the event of a
collision. Both drivers and passengers should always use
the PAD indicator light as an indication if the front
passenger is properly positioned or not. If the PAD
indicator light comes on when an adult is in the passenger seat, have the passenger re-position themselves in the
seat until the light goes out.
Remember, if the PAD indicator light is illuminated the
passenger front airbag will not inflate. For properly
installed child restraint systems and children properly
seated on the front passenger seat, the airbag will be
disabled. If at all possible, place children 12 years and
younger in a back seat.
• The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located beneath the front passenger seat. The OCM
classifies the occupant into one of three size categories
based on the input from the Bladder Assembly and
Belt Tension Sensor. The size categories include empty,
child, and adult. The OCM sends the Occupant Classification to the ORC to identify if a front passenger
airbag is allowed. If a fault is present, the AIRBAG
warning light is illuminated.
• The Passenger Airbag Disabled (PAD) Indicator
Light indicates to the driver and passenger when the
airbag is turned OFF in the presence of a properly
seated occupant. When the PAD indicator light is
illuminated, the airbag is OFF. Also, when the Occupant Classification System (OCS) detects either an
empty seat of a weight less than the predetermined
occupant threshold, the ORC will not illuminate the
PAD indicator light even though the airbag is turned
off. When the OCS detects an adult the PAD indicator
light will be off, and the airbag will be enabled.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The Belt Tension Sensor (BTS) is located at the
outboard passenger lap belt anchor. The BTS generates
a signal based on outboard lap belt tension. This signal
is sent to the OCM to ensure that the resultant bladder
pressure increase due to applied lap belt tension does
not cause a small occupant to be classified as a larger
occupant.
• The Bladder Assembly is located beneath the seat
cushion foam. The pressure sensor sends a signal to
the OCM.
The front passenger seat assembly contains critical components that affect the front passenger airbag deployment. Correctly functioning front passenger seat components are critical for the Occupant Classification System
(OCS) to properly classify the front passenger and calculate the proper airbag deployment. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat components,
assembly, or to the seat cover.
55
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the front passenger seat assembly, its related components, or seat cover may inadvertently change the
airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an accident. A modified vehicle may not comply with
required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(FMVSS).
The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
• Do not modify the front seat center console or center
position seat in any way.
2
56
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not
designated for the specific model being repaired. Always use the correct seat cover specified for the
vehicle.
• Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat
cover.
• Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those
approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.
• At no time should any supplemental restraint system
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener be modified or replaced with any part except
those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/
Mopar.
If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag system is designed to deploy the airbags
when the ORC and impact sensors detect a moderate-tosevere collision, to help restrain the vehicle passengers,
and then immediately deflate.
NOTE: A collision that is not severe enough to need
airbag protection will not activate the system. This does
not mean something is wrong with the airbag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
• As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
57
WARNING!
Deployed airbags, seat belt pretensioners and driver
inflatable knee blocker cannot protect you in another collision. Have the airbags, seat belt pretensioners, driver inflatable knee blocker and the front
passenger seat belt retractor assembly, replaced by
an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Also, have
the Occupant Classification System serviced as well.
Enhanced Accident Response
If the airbags and seat belt pertensioners deploy after an
impact and the electrical system remains functional,
vehicles equipped with power door locks will unlock
automatically. In addition, approximately 10 seconds
after the vehicle has stopped moving, the interior lights
will illuminate until the ignition switch is turned off.
2
58
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause
•
it to fail when you need it. You could be injured because the
airbags are not there to protect you. Do not modify the
components or wiring, including adding any kind of
badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or
the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify
the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or frame.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag
system. The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not
function properly if modifications are made. Take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced airbag
system service. If your seat including your trim cover and
cushion needs to be serviced in any way (including removal
or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the
vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify an advanced airbag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
WARNING!
• You need proper knee impact protection in a
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
equipment on or behind the knee bolsters.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has airbags.
Airbag Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. While
the airbag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system immediately.
• The AIRBAG light does not come on or flickers during
the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first
turned on.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second
interval.
• The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
driving.
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times — babies and children, too. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buckled up in a seat appropriate for their age and size.
According to crash statistics, children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear seats, rather than in the
front.
59
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny
baby, can become a missile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your lap
could become so great that you could not hold the
child, no matter how strong you are. The child and
others could be badly injured. Any child riding in
your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the
child’s size.
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Each vehicle, is equipped with two child restraint anchorage systems called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. The LATCH child
restraint anchorage systems are installed on all secondrow seats.
2
60
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The lower anchor bars of the LATCH System are located
where the seat back meets the seat cushion.
Tether Strap Mounting
Latch Anchorages
The tether anchors are located on the rear surface of the
seat.
Child restraint systems designed to be compatible with
the vehicles LATCH System are now available. LATCH
child restraints make installation into the vehicle simple
and convenient.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
61
When using the LATCH System, always follow the child
restraint manufactures installation instructions.
NOTE: If your child restraint seat is not LATCH compatible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts.
Tether Anchors
There are tether strap anchorages behind all second row
seating positions and if equipped the driver’s side third
row seating position. The tether anchors are located in
the rear surface of the seat. When using the tether
anchorages in the second row seating position, ensure
that the strap is routed over the top of the seatback and
under the head restraint between the head restraint posts.
2
Second Row Tether
62
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When the tether anchorage is used in the third row
seating position, the strap should be positioned straight
over the top of the seatback.
Third Row Tether Strap Routing
Infants and Children
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat owner’s manual to ensure you have the right seat for
your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your child:
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 9 kg (20 lbs). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and ⬙convertible⬙ child seats. Both types of
child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage
system. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)” in this section.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 9 kg (20 lbs). ⬙Convertible⬙ child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 9 kg (20 lbs) but are
less than one year old.
• Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.
• Children who weigh more than 9 kg (20 lbs) and who
are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
63
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who weigh 9 to 18 kg (20 to 40 lbs) and who
are older than one year.
• The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 18 kg (40 lbs), but who are still too small
to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child can
not sit with knees bent over the vehicles seat cushion
while the child’s back is against the seat back, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child
and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt. (Some booster seats are equipped with a
front shield and are held in the vehicle by the lap
portion.)
NOTE:
For additional
www.seatcheck.org.
information
refer
to
2
64
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a
deploying passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it, before you buy it.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
The passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching
latch plates, which are designed to keep the lap
portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. Pulling up on the
shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will tighten
the belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the belt
tight, however, any seat belt system will loosen with
time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if
necessary.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Don’t leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
cause serious personal injury.
Installing A Child Restraint
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap, a hook and means for adjusting the
tension in the strap.
65
In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower
straps and tether straps so that you can more easily attach
the hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tether
anchorages. Then tighten all three straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Child restraint systems having attachments designed to
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
to the seatback tether anchorage have been available for
some time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers
will provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their
older products.
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
2
66
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage
of all of the available attachments provided with your
child restraint in any vehicle.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instructions that come with the child restraint system.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet could be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your new vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55
mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided.
67
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
shown in Section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT
OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE
USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered as a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
2
68
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SAFETY TIPS
WARNING!
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow the safety tips below.
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
If you are required to drive with the deck lid/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn
webbing, etc. If there is any question regarding belt or
retractor condition, replace the belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Airbag Light
The light should come on and remain on for 6
to 8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the LED is not lit
during starting, have it checked. If the light
stays on or comes on while driving, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
69
lodged in the tread. Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts or
cracks. Check wheel nuts for tightness, and tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or fuel, power steering fluid or brake
fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and
corrected immediately.
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
3
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
▫ Heated Remote Control Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . .78
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . .76
䡵 Hands–Free Communication (UConnect™)
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
▫ Driver’s Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
▫ Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . .76
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
▫ Outside Mirror — Driver’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . .77
▫ UConnect™ System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
▫ Outside Mirror — Passenger’s Side . . . . . . . . . .77
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
▫ Power Remote-Control Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
UConnect™ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
72
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
▫ Third Row Seating — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 113
▫ 10–Way Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . 102
▫ Load Floor — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
▫ 8–Way Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . . 103
▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
▫ 4–Way Passenger’s Power Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
䡵 Driver Memory System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 116
▫ Adjustable Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
䡵 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ Second Row Manual Seat Recliner
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
▫ Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights . . . . . 120
▫ Second Row Manual Seat Adjuster
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
▫ Second Row Bench Seating — If Equipped . . . 109
▫ Second Row Fold & Tumble Seats
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Third Row Easy Exit — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 111
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ Multi-Function Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
▫ Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only) . . . . . 124
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
73
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
䡵 Traction Control Switch — If Equipped . . . . . . . 130
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
䡵 Rear Park Assist System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 131
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
䡵 Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 133
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
䡵 Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
▫ Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch . . . . . . . . . 125
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
䡵 Overhead Console — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
䡵 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
3
74
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 138
▫ Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off . . . . . . . 150
▫ Programming Homelink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Canadian Programming/Gate Programming . . 143
▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Using Homelink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ Second Row Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Erasing Homelink Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ Third Row Seat Cupholders — If Equipped . . . 151
▫ Reprogramming a Single Homelink Button . . . 144
䡵 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
▫ Rear Cargo Storage Bin — If Equipped . . . . . . 152
▫ Express Open Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped . 152
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Cargo Tie-Down Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
䡵 Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 155
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
䡵 Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear
window. A two point pivot system allows for horizontal
and vertical adjustment of the mirror.
Adjusting Rear View Mirror
75
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward windshield).
3
76
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
If the switch is in the “Auto” position the mirror will
automatically adjust for annoying headlight glare from
vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by
pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light in the
mirror will illuminate to indicate when this feature is on.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the
mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and
wipe the mirror clean.
Driver’s Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer — If
Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight
glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn this feature
on or off by pressing the button at the base of the
Rearview Mirror.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature
All exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions; full forward, full rearward, and
normal.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirror — Driver’s Side
Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of
traffic, with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
inside mirror.
Outside Mirror — Passenger’s Side
Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the
side of your vehicle in the portion of the mirror closest to
the vehicle. This type of mirror will give a much wider
view to the rear, and especially of the lane next to your
vehicle.
77
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your right
side mirror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other object.
Use your inside mirror when judging the size or
distance of a vehicle seen in this convex mirror.
3
78
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Remote-Control Mirrors
Use the mirror select switch, located on the driver’s door
trim panel above the power window switches, to adjust
the view obtained in the outside mirrors.
Press the rocker switch to the L or R for Left or Right
mirror selection. Use the center off position to guard
against accidentally moving a mirror position.
Select a mirror and press one of the four arrows for the
direction you want the mirror to move.
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Memory
Seat” in section 3 of this manual.
Heated Remote Control Mirrors
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature
is activated whenever you turn on the Rear Window
Defrost.
Power Mirror Switches
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
79
Sun Visor Extension
The sun visors may be pulled out to provide extended
coverage of the side glass.
For UConnect Customer Support call 1-877-855-8400 or
visit the UConnect website (www.chrysler.com/
uconnect).
HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) —
IF EQUIPPED
UConnect™ is a voice-activated, hands-free, in vehicle
communications system. UConnect™ allows you to dial
a phone number with your cellular phone* using simple
voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call ѧ Mike ѧWork⬙ or ⬙Dial ѧ
248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular phone’s audio is transmitted
through your vehicle’s audio system; the system will
automatically mute your radio when using the UConnect™ system.
UConnect™ allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle, and enables you to mute the system’s microphone for private conversation.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙
version 0.96 or higher.
The UConnect™ phonebook enables you to store up to 32
names and four numbers per name. This system is driven
through your Bluetooth™ Hands-Free profile cellular
phone. UConnect™ features Bluetooth™ technology - the
global standard that enables different electronic devices
to connect to each other without wires or a docking
station, so UConnect works no matter where you stow
your cellular phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned on and has been
paired to the vehicle’s UConnect™ system. The UConnect™ system allows up to seven cellular phones to be
3
80
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
linked to system. Only one linked (or paired) cellular
phone can be used with the system at a time. The system
is available in English, Spanish, or French languages (as
equipped).
The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the
system and the control buttons that will enable you to
access the system. The diagram below shows the mirror
with the appropriate buttons. Individual button behavior
is discussed in the ⬙Operation⬙ section.
UConnect™ Switches
The UConnect™ system can be used with any HandsFree Profile certified Bluetooth™ cellular phone. If your
cellular phone supports a different profile (eg., Headset
Profile), you may not be able to use any UConnect™
features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the
phone manufacturer for details.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The UConnect™ system is fully integrated with the
vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect™
system can either be adjusted from the radio volume
control knob, or from the steering wheel radio control
(right switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the UConnect™ system such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect™
system and to navigate through the UConnect™ menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
UConnect™ system prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the voice on beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt
or another prompt.
81
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• For each of the feature explanation in this section, only
the combined form of the voice command is given.
You can also break the commands into parts and say
each part of the command, when you are asked for it.
For example, you can either use the combined form
voice command ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can
break the combined form command into two voice
commands: ⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the UConnect™ system works best when you
talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to
some one sitting eight feet away from you.
3
82
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to
know what your options are at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙
following the voice on beep. The UConnect™ system will
play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the UConnect™ system from idle, simply
press the ’Phone’ button and follow audible prompts for
directions. All UConnect™ system sessions begin with a
press of the ’Phone’ button on the mirror.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the voice on beep, you can say
⬙Cancel⬙ and you will be returned to the main menu.
However, in a few instances the system will take you
back to the previous menu.
Pair (Link) UConnect™ System to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your UConnect™ system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth™ enabled cellular phone (refer to ⬙Introduction⬙ section to learn about the phone
type). To complete the pairing process, you will need to
reference your cellular phone owner’s manual. One of the
following vehicle specific websites may also provide
detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone
that you have:
NOTE: www.chrysler.com/uconnect
The following are general phone to UConnect™ System
pairing instructions:
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• When prompted, after the voice on beep, say ⬙Pair a
Phone.⬙
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number which
you will later need to enter into your cellular. You can
enter any four-digit pin number. You will not need to
remember this pin number after the initial pairing
process.
• The UConnect™ system will then prompt you to begin
the cellular phone pairing process on your cellular
phone. Before attempting to pair phone, please see
your cellular phone’s user manual (Bluetooth section)
for instructions on how to complete this step.
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnect™ system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
• You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between 1 and 7, 1 being the highest
priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
your UConnect™ system. However, at any given time,
83
only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
your UConnect™ System. The priority allows the
UConnect™ system to know which cellular phone to
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect™
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
cellular phone at any time (refer to ⬙Advanced Phone
Connectivity⬙ section).
Dial by Saying a Number
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Dial.⬙
• System will prompt you to say the number you want
call.
3
84
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901.⬙ The phone
number that you enter must be of valid length and
combination. The UConnect™ limits the user from
dialing invalid combination of numbers. For example,
234-567-890 is nine digits long, which is not a valid
phone number - the closest valid phone number has
ten digits.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the UConnect™ phonebook. Refer to section ⬙Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook,⬙ to learn how to store a name in the
phonebook.
• The UConnect™ system will confirm the phone number and then dial. The number will appear in the
display of certain radios.
• The UConnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name
Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
NOTE: Adding names to phonebook is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Call.⬙
• System will prompt you to say the name of the person
you want call.
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and is recommended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or ⬙Robert⬙
instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.:
⬙Home,⬙ ⬙Work,⬙ ⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The UConnect™ system will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations.
85
Edit Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to phonebook is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry
in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or
return to the main menu.
3
86
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add John Doe’s
work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ feature.
• After you enter the name, the UConnect™ system will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, mobile or pager. Say the designation you wish
to delete.
Delete Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the ⬙Voice Recognition⬙ button
while the UConnect™ system is playing the desired
entry and say ⬙Delete.⬙
Delete All Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
• The UConnect™ system will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
List All Names in the UConnect™ Phonebook
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙
• The UConnect™ system will play the names of all the
phonebook entries.
• To call one of the names in the list, press the ⬙Voice
Recognition’ button during the playing of the desired
name and say ⬙Call⬙. NOTE: the user can also exercise
⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙ operations at this point.
• The UConnect™ system will then prompt you as to
number designation you wish to call.
• The selected number will be dialed.
87
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
UConnect™ system if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the UConnect™ system. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
UConnect™ system will interrupt the vehicle audio
system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. To reject the call, press and hold the ’Phone’ button
until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming
call was rejected.
3
88
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
phone. Press the ’Phone’ button to place the current call
on hold and answer the incoming call. NOTE: The
UConnect™ system compatible phones in market today
do not support rejecting an incoming call when another
call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only either
answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call while Current Call in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently in a call,
press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say ⬙Dial⬙ or
⬙Call⬙ followed by the phone number or phonebook entry
you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the
second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer
to section ⬙Toggling Between Two Calls.⬙ To combine two
calls, refer to section ⬙Conference Call.⬙
Place / Retrieve a Call from Hold
To put a call on hold, press the ’Phone’ button until you
hear a single beep which will indicate that the call has
been placed on hold. To bring the call back from hold,
press and hold the ’Phone’ button for 1 to 3 seconds.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the ’Phone’ button until you hear a single beep
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
time.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
89
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Redial
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the ’Voice Recognition’ button while a call is in progress and make a second
phone call as described in section ⬙Making a Second Call
while Current Call in Progress.⬙ After the second call has
established, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you
hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have
been joined into one conference call.
• The UConnect™ system will call the last number that
was dialed on your cellular phone. Note: this may not
be the last number dialed from the UConnect™ system.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the ’Phone’
button. All active calls will be terminated.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Redial.⬙
Call Continuation
Call continuation is progression of a phone call on
UConnect™ system after the vehicle ignition key has
been switched to off. Call continuation functionality can
be of three types:
3
90
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• After ignition key is switched off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system either until the call ends or
until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of
the call on the UConnect™ system and transfer of the
call to the mobile phone.
• After ignition key is switched to off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system for certain duration, after
which the call is automatically transferred from the
UConnect™ system to the mobile phone.
• An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off.
Vehicles, such as Pacifica, support this approach.
UConnect™ System Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the UConnect™ system is
using,
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
(English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped).
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every UConnect™ language change operation, you need to re-enter names to the phonebook
and re-pair (re-link) phone(s).
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect™ system
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Emergency⬙ and the UConnect™ system will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency number. This feature is only supported in the USA.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system does slightly lower
your chances of successfully making a phone call as to
that for the cell phone directly.
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UConnect™ system to allow use of this vehicle feature in
emergency situations when the cell phone has network
coverage and stays paired to the UConnect™ system.
91
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance,
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
Please refer to the 24-Hour Towing Assistance coverage
details in the DaimlerChrysler Corporation 24-Hour
Towing Assistance Program Guide.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to section ⬙Working with
Automated Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for
pagers of certain companies which timeout a little too
soon to work properly with the UConnect™ system.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to section
⬙Working with Automated Systems.⬙
3
92
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Working with Automated Systems
This method is designed to be used in instances where
one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone
keypad while navigating through an automated telephony system.
You can use your UConnect™ system to access a voicemail system or an automated service, such as, paging
service or automated customer service. Some services
require immediate response selection, in some instances,
that may be too quick for use of UConnect™ system.
When calling a number with your UConnect™ system
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can push
the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say the sequence you
wish to enter followed by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example,
if required to enter your pin number followed with a
pound 3 7 4 6 #, you can press the ’Voice Recognition’
button and say ⬙3 7 4 6 # Send.⬙ Saying a number, or
sequence of numbers, followed by ⬙Send⬙ is also to be
used to navigate through an automated customer service
center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The ’Voice Recognition’ button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is playing ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear
aѧ,⬙ you could press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and
say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g. the UConnect™ system will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The UConnect™ system will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
The UConnect™ system will provide notification to
inform you if your cellular phone is in roaming status,
has low signal strength, or has a low battery when you
are trying to place a phone call.
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the UConnect™ system (while
dialing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth™ cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The UConnect™ system will work the
same as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
93
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the UConnect™ system to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number, the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
Mute/Un-mute (Mute off)
When you mute the UConnect™ system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UConnect™ system:
• Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Mute.⬙
In order to un-mute the UConnect™ system:
• Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
3
94
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Mute-off.⬙
Information Service
When using AT&T Wireless Service, dialing to phone
number ⬙#121,⬙ you can access voice activated automated
system to receive news, weather, stocks, traffic, etc.
related information.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The UConnect™ system allows on going calls to be
transferred to your cellular phone to the UConnect™
system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your UConnect™ paired cellular phone to
the UConnect™ system or vice-versa, press the ’Voice
Recognition’ button and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
UConnect™ System and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth™ connection between a UConnect™ paired cellular
phone and the UConnect™ system, follow the instruction
described in your cellular phone user’s manual.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup List Phones⬙.
• When prompted, say ⬙List Phones⬙.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The UConnect™ system will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority.
Select another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone with the UConnect™ system. The phone must
have been previously paired to the UConnect™ system
that you want to use it with.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Select Phone.⬙
• When prompted, say the phone name of the cellular
phone you wish to use, or say ⬙List Phones⬙ to hear a
list of all the phones that have been paired to your
UConnect™ system. To select a phone from the list,
press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say ⬙Select.⬙
95
• A lower priority phone will only be used for the next
phone call. After that, the UConnect™ system will
return to using the highest priority phone present in or
near (approximately with in 30 feet) the vehicle.
Delete UConnect™ Paired Cellular Phones
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete.⬙
• You will be asked to say the name of the phone that
you wish to delete. You can either say the name of the
phone that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙All⬙ to
delete all the phones.
3
96
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Things You Should Know About Your UConnect™
System
• low road noise,
Voice Recognition (VR)
• fully closed windows,
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting approximately eight (8) feet
away from you.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
• Performance is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• smooth road surface,
• dry weather condition.
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English and Spanish accents, the
system may not always work for some.
• When navigating through an automated system, such
as, voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙send.⬙
• Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in
motion is recommended.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the UConnect™ phonebook.
• UConnect™ phonebook name tag recognition rate is
optimized for the person who stored the name in the
phonebook.
• You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero). ⬙800⬙ must be
spoken ⬙eight-zero-zero.⬙
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
Far End Audio Performance:
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
97
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows, and
• dry weather condition.
• Operation from driver seat.
• Performance, such as, audio clarity, echo. and loudness to a large degree, rely on the phone and network,
and not the UConnect™ system.
• Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering
the in-vehicle audio volume.
3
98
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Bluetooth Communication Link
Cellular phones have been found to occasionally loose
connection to the UConnect™ system. When this happens, the connection can generally be re-established by
switching the phone off/on. Your cell phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ⬙on⬙ mode.
Reset
In rare instances, it may be necessary to reset the UConnect™ system. The reset feature is exercised by pressing
and holding the ’UConnect™ ’ and ’Voice Recognition’
buttons simultaneously for 15 seconds. Normally, you do
not need to exercise this feature.
Power-Up
After switching ignition key from off to either On or ACC
position, or after a reset, you must wait at least five (5)
seconds prior to using the system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
99
3
100
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
101
3
102
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SEATS
10–Way Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped
The driver’s power seat switches are located on the
driver’s front door trim panel. The bottom switch controls up/down, forward/rearward, and tilt adjustment.
The top switch controls the seatback recline adjustment
and the middle switch controls the lumbar adjustment.
10–Way Driver’s Power Seat
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured.
8–Way Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped
The driver’s power seat switches are located on the
driver’s front door trim panel. The bottom switch controls up/down, forward/rearward, and tilt adjustment.
The top switch controls the seatback recline adjustment.
103
4–Way Passenger’s Power Seat
The front passenger’s power seat switches are located on
the passenger’s front door trim panel. The bottom switch
controls forward and rearward adjustment. The top
switch controls the seatback recline adjustment.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
3
104
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustable Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Pull up or push down
on the head restraint so that the upper edge is as high as
practical. To raise the head restraint, pull up on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, depress the release
tab located at the base of the head restraint and push
down on the head restraint.
Adjustable Head Restraints
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Seats — If Equipped
This feature heats the driver, front passenger and second
row seats. The controls for the front heated seats are
located on the door trim panel next to the power seat
switches.
Front Heated Seat Switch
105
Press the switch once to select a heat setting (high or low)
and press the switch a second time in the same direction
to turn the heated seat off. The indicator light will show
when LOW or HIGH heat is ON.
3
106
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The controls for the second row heated seats are located
on the center console between the seats. Press the switch
once to select a heat setting (high or low) and press the
switch a second time in the same direction to turn the
heated seat off. The indicator light will show when LOW
or HIGH heat is ON.
NOTE:
• If the lights in the second row heated seat switch begin
to flash when the switch is pressed, it indicates that the
heated seat is not functioning properly and that service is required. See your authorized dealer for service.
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
2 to 3 minutes.
• The heated seats will turn off when the ignition switch
is turned to the OFF position.
Rear Heated Seat Switches
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
107
Second Row Manual Seat Recliner — If Equipped
The recliner mechanism control is on the outboard side of
the seat. To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever,
then push back to the desired position and release the
lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to return the
seatback to its normal position. Using body pressure, lean
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback
has latched.
3
Seatback Release Lever
NOTE: When using the recliner mechanism with the 3rd
row seat folded down, the second row seat may need to
be adjusted forward to achieve full recline.
108
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or fatally injured. Use the recliner only
when the vehicle is parked.
Second Row Manual Seat Adjuster — If Equipped
The adjusting bar is located under the front of the seat.
Pull the bar up and move the seat to the desired position.
Release the bar to lock the seat into position.
Second Row Manual Seat Adjuster
Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
109
WARNING!
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The seat belt might not be properly
adjusted and you could be injured.
3
Second Row Bench Seating — If Equipped
The second row seats may be used with either or both
seatbacks folded forward for additional storage space.
To fold the seat, remove any objects from in front of or on
the seat. Then pull handle located on the seatback and
push the seatback forward.
Seatback Release Handle
To raise the second row seat, lift up on the seatback and
push rearward until the seatback is latched. Move the
seatback forward to be sure the seatback is fully latched.
110
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Be sure there is nothing in front of the second row
seat cushion before folding it down. Damage to the
seat may occur.
4. Pull up on the seatback release lever located on the
outboard side of the seat labeled “1” and fold the
seatback down.
Second Row Fold & Tumble Seats — If Equipped
The second row seats can be folded and tumbled forward
for easy access to the third seat or rear cargo area.
To fold and tumble the seat, follow these steps:
1. Remove any obstructions from the floor in front of the
seat.
2. Lower the head restraint to its full downward position
and rotate the arm rest to the upright position.
3. Move the seat to the full rear position.
Seatback Release Lever
To assure the seatback is latched in the folded position,
additional downward pressure on the seatback may be
required when folding.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. Pull up on the release handle labeled “2” and lift
firmly to tumble the seat fully forward. If the seat
contacts the rear of the front seat, move the front seat
forward.
111
To relatch the seat, tilt the seat rearward and push down
firmly to engage the rear attachments. Then lift the
seatback release lever labeled “1” and pull the seatback
up to return it to its full upright position.
WARNING!
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
latched.
Seat Release Handle
Third Row Easy Exit — If Equipped
For passengers sitting in the third row seats, the second
row seats can be folded and tumbled forward for easy
exit.
3
112
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To fold and tumble the seat forward, follow these steps:
1. Pull up on the seatback release handle “1” located on
the back of the seat to fold the seatback down.
Release Strap 2 Location
Release Handle 1 Location
2. Pull the release strap “2” located at the bottom of the
seat to lift and tumble the seat forward.
To relatch the seat, tilt the seat rearward and push down
firmly to engage the rear attachments. Then lift the
seatback release lever labeled “1” and pull the seatback
up to return it to its full upright position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Third Row Seating — If Equipped
The third row seats may be used with either or both
seatbacks folded forward for additional storage space.
To fold the seat, remove any objects from in front of or on
the seat. Then pull handle located on the seatback and
push it forward.
113
WARNING!
Do not sit in the 3rd row seat with the second row
seatbacks folded or with the second row seats folded
and tumbled. In a collision, you could slide under
the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured.
To raise the 3rd row seat, lift up on the seatback and push
rearward until the seatback is latched. Move the seatback
forward to be sure the seatback is fully latched.
CAUTION!
Be sure there is nothing in front of the 3rd row seat
cushion before folding it down. Damage to the seat
may occur.
Seat Release Handle
3
114
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Not all head restraints in this vehicle are the same.
•
•
•
•
Head restraints from one seating position should not
be removed and installed in any other seating position. In a collision, serious injury or death may result
if the proper head restraint is not installed on each
seat.
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle should not
be used as a play area by children. They could be
seriously injured in a collision. Children should be
seated and using the proper restraint system.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Load Floor — If Equipped
For additional cargo space, the second and third row
seatbacks may be folded forward and the load floor
extended to cover the center console.
To extend the load floor, follow these steps:
1. Move the second row seats to the full rear position.
2. Fold the second and third row seatbacks down.
3. Pull on the load floor strap and lift the panel from the
driver’s second row seatback over the center console and
onto the passenger second row seat.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
115
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
handles are built into the seatbacks of all front seats. The
floor supports the partial weight of the bagged goods.
3
Load Floor Panel
NOTE: Be sure to reattach the strap to secure the load
floor panel when not in use.
Grocery Bag Holders
116
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
DRIVER MEMORY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with memory systems, your
remote keyless entry transmitter or memory seat buttons
on the driver’s door panel can be used to recall the
driver’s seat, outside mirrors, adjustable pedals (if
equipped) and radio station presets to saved positions.
The memory seat buttons located on the driver’s door
will always recall stored settings. The remote keyless
entry transmitter can be programmed to recall positions
when the UNLOCK button is pressed. Refer to the
following procedure on how to link a remote keyless
entry transmitter to a position.
NOTE: The vehicle must be in Park to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
in Park, a message will be displayed in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
Driver Memory Switches
To recall memory positions press memory button number
1 if you are recalling the memory position for driver one
or press memory button number 2 if you are recalling the
memory position for driver two. A recall can be cancelled
by pressing any of the memory buttons during a recall.
When a recall is cancelled, the seat stops moving and a
delay of approximately one second will occur before any
other recalls can be selected.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle has been delivered with two remote keyless
entry transmitters. One or both transmitters can be linked
to either memory position. Up to eight remote keyless
entry transmitters can be used with your vehicle. The
memory seat system can also accommodate up to eight
transmitters linked to either of the two stored seat
positions or any combination of the two positions.
To Program Memory Seat Buttons & RKE
Transmitters, Follow These Steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Select Remote Linked to Memory from the EVIC and
enter “Yes”.
3. Use the seat, mirror and adjustable pedal switches to
adjust the seat, recliner, side view mirrors and adjustable
pedals to the desired positions.
4. Set the radio station presets.
117
5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
remove the key.
6. Press and release the SET (S) button located on the
driver’s door. A light in the button will flash telling you
that you are in the set memory mode. You have five
seconds to complete the next step.
7. Within 5 seconds, press and release button 1 or 2 on
the driver’s door. A chime will sound signaling you that
the driver memory has been set. A message will also be
displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC), indicating a position has been set.
8. Within 5 seconds, press and release the LOCK button
on one of the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitters. A
chime will sound signaling you that the transmitter has
been successfully linked. A message will also be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC), indicating the transmitter has been linked.
3
118
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Repeat the above steps for the second position using the
other driver’s door numbered button and Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter.
Each time the SET (S) button and a numbered button are
pressed, you erase the old memory and store a new one.
To Disable A Transmitter Link, Follow These Steps:
1. Select “Remote Linked To Memory” from the Electronic Vehicle Information Center, Customer Programmable features.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
remove the key.
3. Press and release the SET (S) button located on the
driver’s door. A light in the button will flash telling you
that you are in the set memory mode. You have five
seconds to complete the next step.
4. Within 5 seconds, press and release button 1 or 2 on
the driver’s door. A chime will sound signaling you that
the driver memory has been set. A message will also be
displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC), indicating a position has been set.
5. Within 5 seconds, press and release the UNLOCK
button on the remote keyless entry transmitters. A chime
will sound signaling you that the transmitter link has
been successfully disabled. A message will also be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC), indicating the transmitter has been disabled.
To disable another transmitter from memory positions 1
or 2, repeat steps 1– 4 for each transmitter.
NOTE: This function can be selected using the “Customer Programmable Features” in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) section, Otherwise see your
authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released. First pull
the hood release lever located under the left side of the
instrument panel.
119
Next, push to the left the safety catch located under the
front edge of the hood, near the center.
3
Hood Safety Catch
Hood Release Lever
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position.
120
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 15
cm (6 inches) and then drop it. This should secure both
latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully
closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches
are fully latched before driving.
LIGHTS
Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Each light is turned ON by pressing
the lens. Press the lens a second time to turn the light
OFF. The lights also turn on when a door is opened or the
dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the second
detent.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
121
NOTE: The lights will remain on until the switch is
pressed a second time, so be sure they have been turned
off before leaving the vehicle.
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
The interior lights will automatically turn off in about 15
minutes if a door is left open or the dimmer control is left
in the Dome light position. Turn the ignition switch ON
to restore the interior light operation.
Map/Reading Lights
3
122
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Multi-Function Lever
The Multi-Function Lever controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, turn signals, headlight beam
selection, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights,
the passing lights, and fog lights. The lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel
Lights
Turn the end of the Multi-Function Lever to the first
detent for parking light and instrument panel light
operation. Turn to the second detent for headlight, park
light and instrument panel light operation.
To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights,
rotate the center portion of the Multi-Function Lever up
or down.
Dimmer Control
With the parking lights or headlights
on, rotating the dimmer control for the
interior lights on the Multi-Function
Lever upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights.
Multi-Function Control Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
123
Dome Light Position
Rotate the dimmer control completely
upward to the second detent to turn
on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens
the odometer and radio display when
the parking lights or headlights are on
during daylight conditions.
Interior light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom “OFF” position. The interior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
Automatic Headlights
This system automatically turns your headlights ON or
OFF based on ambient light levels. To turn the system
ON, turn the end of the Multi-Function Lever to the third
detent position. When the system is ON, the Headlight
Time Delay feature is also ON. This means your headlights will stay ON for up to 90 seconds after you turn the
ignition switch OFF. To turn the Automatic System OFF,
turn the end of the Multi-Function Lever to the OFF
position.
3
124
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will come ON in the Automatic mode.
Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only)
The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime
Running Lights whenever the ignition switch is on, the
headlights are off, and the parking brake is off. The
headlight switch must be used for normal night time
driving.
Lights-on Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds, when leaving your vehicle in an
unlighted area.
To activate the delay feature, turn off the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then turn off the
headlights within 45 seconds. The 90 second delay interval begins when headlight switch is turned off. If the
headlights or park lights are turned back on or the
ignition switch is turned on, the delay will be cancelled.
If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they
will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
of turning the ignition off to activate this feature
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is on the Multi-Function
Lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull
out the end of the Multi-Function Lever.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The fog lights will only operate with the headlights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights will
turn off the fog lights.
Turn Signals
Move the Multi-Function Lever up or down and the
arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to
show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal
lights. You can signal a lane change by moving the lever
partially up or down without moving beyond the detent.
If either light has a very fast flash rate, check for a
defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light
when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the fuse
or indicator bulb is defective.
125
Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch
Pull the Multi-Function Lever towards you to switch the
headlights to HIGH beam. Pull the Lever a second time
to switch the headlights to LOW beam.
Passing Light
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the Multi-Function Lever toward you.
This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam
and remain on until the lever is released.
3
126
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch
on the control lever. The lever is located on the
right side of the steering column. Rotate the end
of the control lever to select the desired wiper speed.
Windshield Washers
To use the front washer, pull the lever toward you and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in
the delay range, the wiper will operate for two wipe
cycles after the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while in the OFF position, the wipers
will operate for two wipe cycles, then turn OFF.
Mist Feature
Push down on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to
clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. As
long as the lever is held down, the wipers will continue
to operate.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
127
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to the second detent for Low
speed wiper operation, or to the third detent for High
speed operation
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the lever to the
first detent position, then turn the end of the lever to
select the desired delay interval. The delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 23 seconds
between cycles, to a cycle every second.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The switch on the right side of the steering column also
controls operation of the rear wiper/washer function.
3
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
128
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rotating the center of the switch up to the DEL (Delay)
position or the ON position will activate the rear wiper.
Push the lever forward to initiate the rear wash function
in any of the three positions. The washer pump will
continue to operate as long as the lever is pressed. Upon
release, the rear wiper will cycle two times before returning to the set position.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. It is located in the front of
the engine compartment on the driver’s side and should
be checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator
antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to
flush out the residual water.
Washer Fluid Reservoir
The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid
when Low Washer Fluid illuminates in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TILT STEERING COLUMN
To tilt the column, pull the lever, located behind the turn
signal control, toward you and move the steering wheel
up or down, as desired. Release the lever to lock the
steering wheel firmly in place.
Tilt Steering Column Control
129
WARNING!
Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering column, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the vehicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
3
130
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TRACTION CONTROL SWITCH — IF EQUIPPED
The traction control Indicator, located in the instrument
cluster, will light up when the Traction Control is in use.
To turn the system OFF, press the Traction Control switch
located on center console next to the ash tray, until the
traction control Indicator in the instrument cluster lights
up.
Traction Control Switch
To turn the system back ON, press the switch a second
time until the traction control Indicator turns OFF.
NOTE:
• The traction control Indicator comes on each time the
ignition switch is turned ON. This will occur even if
you used the switch to turn the system OFF.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
131
• The Traction Control system will make buzzing or
clicking sounds when in operation.
REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system is used to help drivers determine if an
obstacle is in the way of the vehicle while it is backing up
in addition to the use of inside rearview and outside
mirrors.
When the driver selects Reverse the system scans for
objects behind the vehicle using four sensors located in
the rear bumper. Objects can be detected from up to 71
inches (180 cm). A warning display above the rear
window provides both visible and audible warnings
indicating the range of the object.
3
Rear Park Assist Indicator
132
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Rear Park Assist System. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury
or death.
The display contains two sets of yellow and red LEDs
that the driver can see in the rear view mirror. Each side
of the vehicle has its own warning LEDs. The system
provides a visual warning by illuminating one or more
yellow LEDs as the vehicle gets closer to the object. As
the vehicle continues to approaches the object, one red
LED is illuminated and the system emits a series of short
beeps. The tone will remain constant and both red LEDs
are illuminated once the vehicle is within 12 inches (30.5
cm) of the object.
The system can be turned on or off through the electronic
vehicle information center (EVIC) when the vehicle is in
PARK. If the rear park assist system is turned off, a single
chime will sound and the EVIC will display the following
message “PARK ASSIST DISABLED”, when the vehicle is
in reverse.
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris
to keep the system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of the system.
If Service Park Assist System appears in the EVIC after
making sure the rear bumper is clean please see your
authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
133
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedals
to move toward or away from the driver to provide
improved position with the steering wheel. The adjustable pedal system is designed to allow a greater range of
driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position.
The switch is located on the drivers door trim panel next
to the power seat switches.
3
Adjustable Pedal Switch
Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward
(toward the front of the vehicle).
Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
134
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The pedals can be adjusted while driving.
CAUTION!
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in R
(Reverse) or when the Speed Control is ON. A message
will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked out (“Adjustable
Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or “Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”).
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become
limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in
the adjustable pedal’s path.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with memory seat
feature, your remote keyless entry transmitter or memory
seat buttons on the driver’s door panel can be used to
recall the adjustable pedals to saved positions.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, this device takes over the accelerator
operation at speeds greater than 30 mph (50 km/h). The
speed control switches are located on the steering wheel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
135
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidently
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you aren’t using it.
To Set At A Desired Speed:
Speed Control Switches
To Activate:
Push the “ON/OFF” button once and the CRUISE indicator located near the instrument cluster odometer will
illuminate showing the electronic speed control system is
on. To turn the system OFF, push the “ON/OFF” button
again and the system and indicator will turn off.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
and release the “SET” button. Release the accelerator and
the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. The
CRUISE SET indicator located near the instrument cluster odometer will illuminate showing the electronic
speed control is set.
NOTE: While in the AutoStick mode, Speed Control will
only function in third or fourth gear.
3
136
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Deactivate:
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the “CANCEL”
button or normal braking while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate the speed control without erasing the memory.
Pushing the “ON/OFF” button to the OFF position or
turning off the ignition erases the speed memory.
To Resume Speed:
To resume a previously set speed, push and release the
“ACCEL/RESUME” button. Resume can be used at any
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
To Vary the Speed Setting:
When the speed control is set, speed can be increased by
pressing and holding the “ACCEL/RESUME” button.
When the button is released, a new set speed will be
established.
Tapping the “ACCEL/RESUME” button once will result
in a 2 mph (3 km/h) speed increase. Each time the button
is tapped, speed increases so that tapping the button
three times will increase speed by 6 mph (10 km/h), etc.
To decrease speed while speed control is set, press and
hold the “COAST” button. Release the button when the
desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be set.
Tapping the “COAST” button once will result in a 1 mph
(2 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the button is tapped,
speed decreases.
To Accelerate For Passing:
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
NOTE: The speed control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Four speed automatic transmissions will experience a
downshift to 3rd gear while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This downshift to 3rd gear is necessary to
maintain vehicle set speed.
On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without speed control.
137
OVERHEAD CONSOLE — IF EQUIPPED
The overhead console can contain courtesy/reading
lights, an optional universal garage door opener
(HomeLink威), storage for sunglasses, optional power
sunroof switches and an optional power liftgate switch.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
Overhead Console
3
138
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Courtesy/Reading Lights
At the forward end of the console are two courtesy/
reading lights.
Press the lens to turn these lights on. Press a second time
to turn the lights off.
The lights also turn on when a front door, a rear door or
the liftgate is opened. The lights will also turn on when
the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter
is pressed.
Sunglasses Storage
At the rear of the overhead console, a compartment is
provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
Press the door latch to open the compartment. The door
will slowly rotate to an open position.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver replaces up to
three remote controls (hand held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, or home lighting. It triggers these devices at the
push of a button. The Universal Transceiver operates off
your vehicle’s battery and charging system; no batteries
are needed.
For additional information on HomeLink威, call 1–800–
355–3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A moving garage door can cause injury to people and
pets in the path of the door. People or pets could be
seriously or fatally injured. Only use this transceiver
with a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage
door opener without these safety features it could
cause injury or death. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.homelink.com for safety
information or assistance.
139
Programming HomeLink
NOTE: When programming a garage door opener, it is
advised to park outside the garage. Some vehicles may
require the ignition switch to be turned to the second (or
⬙accessories⬙) position for programming and/or operation of HomeLink. It is also recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the
device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker
training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency
signal.
3
140
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons, and
release only when the indicator light begins to flash or
the EVIC display shows “Channels Cleared” (after 20
seconds). Do not hold the buttons for longer than 30
seconds and do not repeat step one to program a second
and/or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two
HomeLink buttons.
Homelink Buttons
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run the vehicle’s exhaust while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the
path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can
cause serious injury or death to people and pets or
damage to objects.
141
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3
inches (3-8 cm) away from the HomeLink buttons while
keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink
button that you want to train and the hand-held transmitter buttons. Do not release the buttons until step 4
has been completed.
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace this Programming Step 3 with
procedures noted in the ⬙Gate Operator/Canadian Programming⬙ section.
4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter and the
EVIC display will show “Channel X Training” (where X
is Channel 1, 2, or 3). Release both buttons after the
indicator light changes from the slow to the rapid flash or
the EVIC display shows “Channel X Trained”.
3
142
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the EVIC display shows “Did Not Train”
repeat steps 2–4.
5. Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light or the EVIC display. If the
indicator light stays on constantly, programming is
complete and your device should activate when the
HomeLink button is pressed and released. If the EVIC
display shows “Channel X Transmit” (where X is Channel 1, 2, or 3), programming is complete and your device
should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed
and released.
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, begin with ⬙Programming⬙ step two. Do not repeat
step one.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and
then turns to a constant light continue with ⴖProgrammingⴖ steps 6-8 to complete the programming of a rolling
code equipped device (most commonly a garage door
opener).
6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit)
in the garage, locate the ⬙learn⬙ or ⬙smart⬙ button. This
can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the ⬙learn⬙ or ⬙smart⬙ button.
(The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.)
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step
eight.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two
seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button.
Repeat the ⴖpress/hold/releaseⴖ sequence a second time,
and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener
(or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this
sequence a third time to complete the programming.
HomeLink should now activate your rolling code
equipped device.
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, begin with ⬙Programming⬙ step two. Do not repeat
step one. For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
Canadian Programming/Gate Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to ⬙time-out⬙ (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming.
143
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to ⬙time-out⬙ in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties
programming a gate operator by using the ⬙Programming⬙ procedures (regardless of where you live), replace
ⴖProgramming HomeLinkⴖ step 3 with the following:
NOTE: If programming a garage door opener or gate
operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the
⬙cycling⬙ process to prevent possible overheating.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button
while you press and release every two seconds (⬙cycle⬙)
your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has
successfully been accepted by HomeLink. The indicator
light will flash slowly and then rapidly and the EVIC
display will show “Channel X Trained” (where X is
Channel 1, 2, or 3). Proceed with ⬙Programming⬙ step
four to complete.
3
144
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using HomeLink
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the
device may also be used at any time. In the event that
there are still programming difficulties or questions,
contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or 1-800-3553515.
Erasing HomeLink Buttons
To erase programming from the three buttons (individual
buttons cannot be erased but can be ⬙reprogrammed⬙ note below), follow the step noted:
• Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash and the EVIC display
shows “Channels Cleared” (after 20 seconds). Release
both buttons. Do not hold for longer that 30 seconds.
HomeLink is now in the train (or learning) mode and
can be programmed at any time beginning with ⬙Programming⬙ - step 2.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button
To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink
button previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds
and the EVIC display will show “Channel X Transmit”
(where X is Channel 1, 2, or 3) for 20 seconds and then
change to “Channel X Training”. Without releasing the
HomeLink button, proceed with ⬙Programming⬙ step 2
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at:
www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Security
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the frequencies
by following the “Erasing HomeLink Buttons” instructions in this section.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof buttons are located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
3
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
HomeLink威 is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls,
Inc.
145
Power Sunroof buttons
146
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press and hold the “OPEN” button rearward to fully
open the sunroof. The sunroof can be stopped at any
position between closed and full open. Momentarily
pressing the “OPEN” button rearward will activate the
Express Open Feature, causing the sunroof to open
automatically.
Press and hold the “VENT” button to open the vent. The
sunroof can be stopped at any position between closed
and full vent. To close the sunroof from the vent position,
press and hold the “CLOSE” button forward. Releasing
the button will stop the movement of the sunroof and the
sunroof will remain in the partial vent position until the
button is pushed forward again.
NOTE: The power sunroof buttons remain active for up
to 45 seconds after the ignition button has been turned
off. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Express Open Feature
The sunroof is equipped with an intermediate stop or
comfort stop position. This feature is designed to eliminate wind buffeting at vehicle speeds between 20-40 mph
(32-64 km/h). To operate this feature, momentarily press
the “OPEN” button rearward to activate the Express
Open Feature and the glass will automatically stop at the
comfort stop position. Pressing the button rearward
again will fully open the sunroof.
During the Express Open operation, any movement of
the button will stop the sunroof and it will remain in a
partial open position. Again, momentarily pressing the
button rearward will activate the Express Open Feature.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To close the sunroof, press and hold the “CLOSE” button
forward. Again, any release of the button will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open
condition until the button is pushed forward again.
The sunshade can be opened manually. It will also open
as the sunroof opens. The sunshade cannot be closed if
the sunroof is open.
147
WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
buttons. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
3
148
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There are two 12 volt power outlets located on the
instrument panel below the radio. The driver’s side outlet
is controlled by the ignition switch and the passenger
side outlet is connected directly to the battery. The
driver’s side outlet will also operate a conventional cigar
lighter unit (if equipped with an optional Smoker’s
Package).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
149
The outlets include tethered caps labeled with a key or
battery symbol indicating the power source. The passenger side instrument panel and center console outlets are
powered directly from the battery, items plugged into
these outlets may discharge the battery and/or prevent
engine starting.
The passenger side and center console outlets are protected by an automatic reset circuit breaker. The automatic circuit breaker restores power when the overload is
removed.
Front Power Outlets
A third outlet is located on the back of the front center
console near the floor, and is also controlled by the
ignition switch.
A fourth outlet is located on the driver’s side, in the rear
cargo area and is also controlled by the ignition switch.
NOTE: If desired, the fourth power outlet in the rear
cargo area can be converted by your authorized dealer to
provide power with the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
3
150
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from
•
•
•
the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e. cellular
phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent engine starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers, vacuum
cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the battery even more
quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater
caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories
still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the
vehicle’s battery.
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage.
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholders
The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the
center console. Push down on the forward edge of the
console to release the cupholders. Press the cover up
when the cupholders are no longer needed.
Six Passenger Seating Cupholders
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Second Row Seat Cupholders
On vehicles equipped with five passenger seating the
second row seat cupholders are located in middle of the
seatback armrest. Pull down on the armrest to access the
cupholders. Push the armrest up when the cupholders
are no longer needed.
151
On vehicles equipped with six passenger seating the
second row seat cupholders are located in the forward
edge of the center console located between the second
row seats. Push down on the forward edge of the console
to release the cupholders. Press the cover up when the
cupholders are no longer needed.
Third Row Seat Cupholders — If Equipped
There are cupholders located in each rear trim panel for
the third row seat passengers.
STORAGE
Console Features
The center consoles may be equipped with a tissue
holder mounted on the underside of the cover. The
bottom of the console bins may also have built in holders
for compact discs or cassette tapes.
Five Passenger Seating Cupholders
3
152
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Cargo Storage Bin — If Equipped
The storage bin is located in the floor of the rear cargo
area. To open lift up on the handle.
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
To cover the cargo area:
1. Fold down the third row seatbacks.
2. Unfold the cargo cover extensions and lock into place.
3. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots
located on the trim panel behind the second row seatbacks.
4. Grasp the center portion of the cover flap. Pull it over
the cargo area.
5. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover flap into the
slots on the rear trim panel.
Rear Storage Bin
6. The liftgate may be opened or closed with the cargo
cover in place.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
153
WARNING!
3. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots
located on the trim panel behind the third row seatbacks.
In an accident a cargo cover loose in the vehicle
could cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden
stop and strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store
the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger
compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle
when taken from its mounting. Do not store in the
vehicle.
4. Grasp the center portion of the cover flap. Pull it over
the cargo area.
Stowed Position
1. Fold down the third row seatbacks.
2. Fold the cargo cover extensions to their stowed position and lock into place.
5. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover flap into the
slots on the rear trim panel.
6. The liftgate may be opened or closed with the cargo
cover in place.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
The tie-downs located on cargo area floor and on the rear
trim panels should be used to safely secure loads when
vehicle is moving.
3
154
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision a hook could pull loose and allow the child
seat to come loose. A child could be badly injured.
Use only the anchors provided for child seat
tethers.
• The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and
vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for
loading your vehicle:
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the
vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
WARNING!
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The
load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
155
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars.
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
To move the cross bars, press the upper edge of each
cross bar button, then move the cross bar to the desired
position. This is can be done with one person standing on
each side of the vehicle, moving the cross bar at the same
time. Once the cross bar is in place, press the lower edge
of the cross bar button to lock it into position.
Attempt to move the crossbar again to ensure that it has
properly locked into position.
Roof Rack
3
156
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: To reduce the amount of wind noise when the
cross bars are not in use, move both cross bars next to
each other towards the rear of the vehicle in the rear most
position.
The tie down holes on the cross bar ends should always
be used to tie down the load. Check the straps frequently
to be sure that the load remains securely attached.
CAUTION!
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity
of 150 lbs (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads
as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads which extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with
large frontal area should be secured to both the
front and rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the
roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or
nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward
loads. This is especially true on large flat loads
and may result in damage to the cargo or your
vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in
personal injury or property damage. Follow the Roof
Rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof
rack.
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM
The automatic load leveling system will provide a level
riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
conditions.
157
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
to complete depending on road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15
hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instruments And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
䡵 Setting The Analog Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
䡵 Base Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
䡵 Electronic Digital Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
䡵 Premium Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
䡵 Sales Code RAH—AM & FM Stereo Radio With
CD Player And CD/DVD Changer Controls . . . . 183
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
▫ Customer Programmable Features
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
▫ Compass Display — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ Mini-Trip Functions — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 182
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
▫ CD Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
▫ CD/DVD Changer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
4
160
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For
MP3 Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
䡵 Sales Code RBP—AM & FM Stereo Radio With
Cassette Tape Player, CD Player, And Optional
CD/DVD Changer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
▫ Tape Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
▫ CD Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
▫ CD/DVD Changer Operation — If Equipped . 201
䡵 6 Disc CD/DVD Changer (RDV) — If Equipped . 203
▫ Operating Instructions — CD/DVD Changer . . 203
▫ Eject (EJT) Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
▫ Operating Instructions — Remote Control . . . . 205
▫ Operating Instructions — Video Screen . . . . . . 210
▫ Operating Instructions — Headphones . . . . . . 211
▫ Operating Instructions — MP3 Player, Portable
Walkman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
▫ Operating Instructions — Video
Games/Camcorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
䡵 Satellite Radio — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ENS/SID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode In RBB, RAH And RBK
Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode In RBP, RBU, RAZ, RB1
And RBQ Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ Selecting a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
▫ Storing And Selecting Pre-Set Channels . . . . . . 216
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Using The PTY (Program Type) Button
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
▫ PTY Button ⬙Scan⬙ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ PTY Button ⬙Seek⬙ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
▫ Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
䡵 Radio General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
▫ Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
▫ Two Types Of Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
161
▫ Electrical Disturbances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ AM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ FM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
䡵 Cassette Tape And Player Maintenance . . . . . . . 220
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . . 222
䡵 Navigation System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 222
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ Manual Air Conditioning And Heating System . 223
▫ Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
▫ Manual Air Conditioning Operation . . . . . . . . 228
▫ Dual-Zone Automatic Temperature Control . . . 232
▫ Electric Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . 243
4
162
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
163
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
164
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Voltage Light
This light monitors the electrical system voltage.
The light should turn on momentarily as the
engine is started. If the light stays on or turns on while
driving, it indicates a problem with the charging system.
Immediate service should be obtained.
2. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
165
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads (H),
Pull over in a safe area as soon as possible and stop
the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner
turned off until the pointer drops back into the
normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”, and
you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately, and call for service.
4
166
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see Section 7 of this manual. Follow
the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure
Cap paragraph.
3. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
The Low Fuel Light will turn on when the fuel level
reaches approximately 2 to 4 gallons (7 to 15 liters)
this light will remain on until fuel is added.
4. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled about one mile with the turn signals on, a chime
will sound to alert you to turn the signals off. If either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for a defective
outside light bulb.
5. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
6. Anti-Lock Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System. The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
7. Brake System Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, there
is a low brake fluid level or there is a problem with the
anit-lock brake system.
167
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
4
168
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an
accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock brakes (ABS), are also
equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD).
In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light
will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair
to the ABS system is required.
The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
the ON position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
8. Traction Control Indicator — If Equipped
This display indicator illuminates momentarily
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON.
The traction control Indicator will turn on if:
• The traction control system is in use.
• The Traction Control switch has been used to turn
the system OFF.
• There is a Traction Control System malfunction.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The system has been deactivated to prevent damage
to the brake system due to overheated brake temperatures.
NOTE: Extended heavy use of Traction Control may
cause the system to deactivate and turn on the Traction
Control Light. This is to prevent overheating of the brake
system and is a normal condition. The system will remain
disabled for about 4 minutes until the brakes have
cooled. The system will automatically reactivate and turn
off the Traction Control Light.
9. Tachometer
The red segments indicate the maximum permissible
engine revolutions-per-minute (r.p.m. x 1000) for each
gear range. Before reaching the red area, ease up on the
accelerator.
10. Trip Odometer Button
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of the two trip odometer settings. The word TRIP
169
and either “A” or “B” will appear when in the trip
odometer mode. Push in and hold the button for two
seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles or kilometers. The odometer must be in trip mode to reset.
11. Transmission Range Indicator
This display indicator shows the automatic transmission
gear selection.
12. AutoStick Light
This display indicator illuminates when the gearshift
lever is moved to the AutoStick position.
13. Odometer/Trip Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
U.S. federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. Therefore, if the odometer reading is changed during repair or
4
170
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading
before and after the service so that the correct mileage can
be determined.
14. Cruise Indicator
This display indicator shows that the Speed Control
System is ON.
The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage. To
switch from odometer to trip odometers, press and
release the Trip Odometer button. To reset a trip odometer, display the desired trip odometer to be reset then
push and hold the button until the display resets (approximately 2 seconds).
15. Malfunction Indicator Light
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system
called OBD that monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON position before engine
start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the key
from OFF to ON, have the condition checked promptly.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged,
GASCAP will be displayed in the instrument cluster
odometer. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press
the odometer reset button to turn the GASCAP message
off. If the problem continues, the message will appear the
next time the vehicle is started. See Section 7 of this
manual for more information.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc. may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The Malfunction Indicator Light flashes to alert you to
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
16. High Beam Light
This light shows that the headlights are on high
beam. Pull the Multi-Function lever towards the
steering wheel to switch the headlights from high or low
beam.
17. Navigation Screen — If Equipped
The navigation system provides maps, turn identification, selection menus and instructions for selecting a
variety of destinations and routes. Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed operating instructions.
18. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This light shows the front fog lights are ON.
171
19. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light shows low engine oil pressure. The light
should turn on momentarily when the engine is
started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
continuous chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
20. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
light will turn on for 5 to 8 seconds as a bulb check.
During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or
when driving, if the driver seat belt remains unbuckled,
the Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on
continuously. Refer to ⬙Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlert™)⬙ in the Occupant Restraints
section for more information.
4
172
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
21. Tire Pressure Monitor Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light will turn on when there is a Low tire
pressure condition. The light will remain on
until the tire pressure is properly set. The light
will also flash if a problem exist with any tire
sensor. The light will flash for approximately three seconds every 10 minutes or until the problem with the
sensor is corrected.
This light will turn on momentarily as a bulb check when
the engine is started.
When the tire pressure monitoring system warning light
is lit, one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. You should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as
indicated on the tire and loading information placard.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Each tire, including the spare, should be checked
monthly when cold and set to the recommended inflation
pressure as specified in the tire and loading information
placard and owner’s manual.
NOTE: If one of the vehicle active tires has been
replaced by the spare or a wheel rim not equipped with
a TPM sensor, the tire pressure monitor warning light
will flash for approximately three seconds every 10
minutes. Repair or replace the tire or sensor as soon as
possible.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
22. Airbag Light
This light turns on and remains on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the light is not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
23. Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display — If
Equipped
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
messages.
24. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If this light is accompanied by a continuous
chime, the engine temperature is critically hot, and
the vehicle should be turned off immediately. The vehicle
should be serviced as soon as possible.
173
25. Liftgate Ajar — If Equipped
This light turns on if the liftgate is not completely closed.
26. Door Ajar Light — If Equipped
This light turns on if a door is not completely
closed.
27. Washer Fluid Light — If Equipped
This light turns on when the washer fluid level
falls below approximately 1/4 filled. The light will
remain on until fluid is added.
4
174
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) consists of the following:
• Vehicle information warning message displays
• Tire Pressure Monitor System — If Equipped
• Customer programmable features
• Compass display
• Mini-Trip functions
Pressing the MENU button will change the displayed
programming features. Pressing the STEP button will
display the available choices. Pressing the MENU button
a second time accepts a selected choice.
When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following
messages.
• LEFT/RIGHT TURN SIGNAL ON (with a continuous
warning chime)
• INVALID KEY & FOB (with a single chime)
• PARK ASSIST DISABLED
• SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
• SERVICE IMMOBILIZER (with a single chime)
• KEY FOB BATTERY LOW (with a single chime)
• KEY & FOB PROGRAMMED (with a single chime)
• PROGRAM KEY & FOB
• MEMORY #1/#2 POSITION SET (with a single chime)
• MEMORY #1/#2 POS SELECTED
• MEMORY SYSTEM DISABLED VEHICLE NOT IN
PARK (with a single chime)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• SET INHIBITED DUE TO MOTION (with a single
chime)
• FOB LINKED (with a single chime)
• FOB UNLINKED (with a single chime)
• PARK BRAKE ENGAGED (with a single chime)
• LOW BRAKE FLUID (with a single chime)
• LOW FUEL (with a single chime)
• MENU IN PARK ONLY
• LIST # ALERT MESSAGES
• UNLOCK TO OPEN LIFTGATE (with a single chime)
• PUT IN PARK FOR LIFTGATE (with a single chime)
• TOO COLD FOR PWR LIFTGATE (with a single
chime)
• TOO HOT FOR PWR LIFTGATE (with a single chime)
175
• PERFORM SERVICE (with a single chime)
• LEFT/RIGHT FRONT DOOR AJAR (one or more,
with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph)
• LEFT/RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR (one or more, with
a single chime if speed is above 1 mph)
• DOOR(S) AJAR (with a single chime)
• DOOR(S) AND GATE AJAR (with a single chime)
• LIFT GATE AJAR (with a single chime if speed is
above 1 mph)
• WASHER FLUID LOW (with a single chime)
• PEDAL ADJUST DISABLED CRUISE ENGAGED
• PEDAL ADJUST DISABLED VEHICLE IN REVERSE
• CHANNEL 1, 2, OR 3 TRANSMIT (with a single
chime)
4
176
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• CHANNEL 1, 2, OR 3 TRAINING (with a single
chime)
• TCS ACTIVE (Traction Control System, with a
graphic)
• CHANNEL 1, 2, OR 3 TRAINED (with a single chime)
• SERVICE TCS SYSTEM (Traction Control System, with
a graphic and single chime)
• CLEARING CHANNELS
• CHANNELS CLEARED
• CHANNELS DEFAULTED
• DID NOT TRAIN
• 1,2,3 OR 4 TIRE(S) LOW PRESSURE (Refer to “Starting
And Operating, Tire Section”)
• 1,2,3 OR 4 TIRE(S) HIGH PRESSURE (Refer to “Starting And Operating, Tire Section”)
• SERVICE TIRE SYSTEM SOON (Refer to “Starting
And Operating, Tire Section”)
• TCS SUSPENDED (Traction Control System, with a
graphic and single chime)
Customer Programmable Features — If Equipped
Press the MENU button until one of the following
display choices appears:
Language?
When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
computer functions and navigation system. Press the
STEP button while in this display selects English,
Francais, or Espanol. As you continue the displayed
information will be shown in the selected language.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Park Assist System? ON/OFF
When this feature is selected the system scans for objects
behind the vehicle using four sensors located in the rear
bumper. Objects can be detected from up to 71 inches
(180 cm). Pressing the “STEP” button while in this
display will disable/enable the Rear Park Assist System.
The EVIC will display the following message: PARK
ASSIST DISABLED after the feature has been disabled
and SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM if there is a problem with the system.
Display U.S. or Metric?
Pressing the US/M button will change the EVIC, odometer, navigation system and A/C Control units from US
to Metric.
Use factory Settings?
When in this display you may select to use the factory
settings and no programmable features will be offered.
177
Auto Door Locks?
When this feature is selected, all doors and the liftgate
lock automatically when the speed of the vehicle reaches
15 mph (25 km/h). Pressing the STEP button when in this
display will select “Yes” or “No.”
Auto Unlock On Exit?
When this feature is selected all the vehicle’s doors will
unlock when the driver’s door is opened if the vehicle is
stopped and the transmission is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position. Pressing the STEP button when in this
display will select “Yes” or “No.”
Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st?
When this feature is selected only the driver’s door will
unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry
unlock button and require a second press to unlock the
remaining locked doors and liftgate. When REMOTE
UNLOCK ALL DOORS is selected all of the doors and
the liftgate will unlock at the first press of the remote
4
178
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
keyless entry unlock button. Pressing the STEP button
when in this display will select DRIVER’S DOOR 1ST or
ALL DOORS.
Remote Linked To Memory? (Available with
Memory Seat Only)
When this feature is selected the memory seat, mirror,
and radio settings will return to the memory set position
when the remote keyless entry “Unlock” button is
pressed. If this feature is not selected then the memory
seat, mirror, and radio settings can only return to the
memory set position using the door mounted switch.
Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select
“Yes” or “No.”
Sound Horn On Lock?
When this feature is selected a short horn sound will
occur when the remote keyless entry “Lock” button is
pressed. This feature may be selected with or without the
flash lights on lock/unlock feature. Pressing the STEP
button when in this display will select “Yes” or “No.”
Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock?
When this feature is selected, the front and rear turn
signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked
using the remote keyless entry transmitter. This feature
may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock
feature selected. Pressing the STEP button when in this
display will select “Yes” or “No.”
Headlamp Delay
When this feature is selected the driver can choose, when
exiting the vehicle, to have the headlamps remain on for
30, 60, or 90 seconds, or not remain on. Pressing the STEP
button when in this display will select 30, 60, 90, or OFF.
Headlamp On With Wipers? (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When this feature is selected and the headlight switch
has at least once been moved to the AUTO position, the
headlights will turn on in approximately 10 seconds
when the wipers are turned on. The headlights will also
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were
turned on in this way. Pressing the STEP button when in
this display will select “Yes” or “No.”
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in this section.
Service Interval
When this feature is selected a service interval between
2,000 miles (3 200 km) and 6, 000 miles (10 000 km) in 500
mile (800 km) increments may be selected. Pressing the
STEP button when in this display will select distances
between 2,000 miles (3 200 km) and 6, 000 miles (10 000
km) in 500 mile (800 km) increments.
179
Reset Service Distance (Displays Only if Service
Interval was Changed)
When this feature is selected the current accumulated
service distance can be reset to the newly selected service
interval. Pressing the STEP button when in this display
will select “Yes” or “No.”
Power Accessory Delay?
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system, DVD video system,
power sunroof, and power outlets will remain active for
up to 45 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned
off. Opening a vehicle door or liftgate will cancel this
feature.
Easy Exit Seat? (Available with Memory Seat Only)
When this feature is selected, the driver’s seat moves
rearward 5 cm (2 inches) or to the farthest rearward
position if this distance is less than 5 cm (2 inches) when
the key is removed from the ignition switch so that the
4
180
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
driver can more easily exit the vehicle. The seat will
return to the memorized seat location (if REMOTE LINK
TO MEMORY is set to YES) when the remote keyless
entry transmitter is used to unlock the door. Pressing the
STEP button when in this display will select “Yes” or
“No.”
Compass Display — If Equipped
This display provides one of eight compass readings to
indicate the direction the vehicle is facing.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the
need to manually set the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display “COMPASS CALIBRATING” until the compass
is calibrated. The compass will calibrate automatically
after approximately 40 seconds if no buttons are pressed
and the vehicle is in Park. You may also calibrate the
compass by completing one 360° turn in an area free from
large metal or metallic objects, the “COMPASS CALIBRATING” EVIC message will turn off and the compass
will function normally.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the “COMPASS CALIBRATING” message does not appear in the EVIC display,
you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode
manually.
To put into a Calibration Mode: Turn on the ignition
switch and set the display to Compass. Press the RESET
button for at least 10 seconds until the “COMPASS
CALIBRATING” message appears. Release the RESET
button and complete one 360° turn in an area free from
large metal objects. The “COMPASS CALIBRATING”
message will turn off and the compass will function
normally.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
181
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. If this occurs, the compass variance must be set.
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the overhead console.
4
182
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To set the variance: Turn the ignition switch ON and set
the display to Compass. Press the RESET button for
approximately 5 seconds but no more than 10 seconds.
The “COMPASS VARIANCE” message and the last variance zone number will be displayed. Press the STEP
button to select the proper variance zone as shown in the
map. Press the RESET button to set the new variance
zone and resume normal operation.
Mini-Trip Functions — If Equipped
This displays information on the following:
• Average Fuel Economy (ECO AVG)
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. The
minimum average fuel economy that will be displayed
on reset is 0.3 mpg.
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined using the MPG for the last few minutes.
• Off Mode
Shows a blank display.
• Step Button
Push this button to cycle through all the Mini-trip
functions.
To Reset The Display
Pressing and releasing the Reset button once will clear
the resettable function currently being displayed. The
resettable function is average fuel economy. Reset will
only occur if the resettable function is currently being
displayed.
SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK
To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument
panel, press and hold the button until the setting is
correct.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK
The clock and radio each use the display panel built into
the radio. A digital readout shows the time in hours and
minutes whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or
ACC position and the time button is pressed.
SALES CODE RAH—AM & FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CD PLAYER AND CD/DVD CHANGER
CONTROLS
When the ignition switch is in the OFF position, or when
the radio frequency is being displayed, time keeping is
accurately maintained.
4
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON or ACC position
and press the time button. Using the tip of a ballpoint pen
or similar object, press either the hour (H) or minute (M)
buttons on the radio.
2. Press the H button to set hours or the M button to set
minutes. The time setting will increase each time you
press a button.
183
RAH radio
184
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio Operation
Power/Volume Control
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn the
volume control clockwise to increase the volume.
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is supplied through
the ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position
to operate the radio.
PTY (Program Type)
Pressing the INFO button once while in FM mode will
turn on the PTY mode for 5 seconds. If no action is taken
during the 5 second time out, the PTY icon will turn off.
Pressing the TUNE button within 5 seconds will allow
the program format type to be selected. Many radio
stations do not currently broadcast PTY information.
Toggle the TUNE button to select the following format
types:
Program Type
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Information
Jazz
Foreign Language
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Radio Display
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Inform
Jazz
Language
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
Radio Display
Rock
Rock
Soft
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Soft R&B
Sports
Sports
Talk
Talk
Top 40
Top 40
Weather
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM and Satellite (if
equipped) modes.
The radio display will flash “SEEK” and the selected PTY
program type when searching for the next PTY station. If
no station is found with the selected PTY program type,
the radio will return to the last preset station.
185
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
Mode
Press the MODE button to select between, AM, FM, CD,
CD/DVD changer or the Satellite Radio (if equipped).
When the Satellite Radio (if equipped) is selected “SA”
will appear in your radio display.
A disc may remain in the radio while in the Satellite or
radio mode.
Seek
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
station in either the AM, FM or Satellite mode. Press the
top of the button to seek up and the bottom to seek down.
The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you
make another selection. Holding the button in will bypass stations without stopping until you release it.
4
186
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tuning
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or
decrease the frequency. If you press and hold the button,
the radio will continue to tune until you release the
button. The frequency will be displayed and continuously updated while the button is pressed.
Balance
The Balance control adjusts the left-to-right speaker balance. Press the AUDIO button, select BALANCE, then
press SEEK + or SEEK ⫺ to adjust the balance.
Fade
The Fade control provides for balance between the front
and rear speakers. Press the AUDIO button, select FADE,
then press SEEK + or SEEK ⫺ to adjust the fade balance.
Tone Control
The Bass and/or Treble controls sound for the desired
tone. Press the AUDIO button, select Bass or TREBLE,
then press SEEK + or SEEK ⫺ to increase or decrease
amplification of the band.
To Set The Radio Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
SET 1 will show in the display window. Select the
push-button you wish to lock onto this station and press
and release that button. If a station is not selected within
5 seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will
continue to play but will not be locked into push-button
memory.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM
stations to be locked into memory. You can recall the
stations stored in SET 2 memory by pressing the pushbutton twice.
To Change From Clock To Radio Mode
Press the TIME button to change the display between
radio frequency and time.
General Information
This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
187
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CD Player Operation
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position and the volume control ON before the CD
player will operate.
• This Radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
4
188
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Inserting The Compact Disc
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept only 4–3/4 inch (12cm)
discs only. The use of other sized discs may damage
the CD player mechanism.
You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the display will show the time of day. If you insert
a disc with the ignition OFF, the display will show the
time of day for about 5 seconds, then go out.
If the power is ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD
mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The
display will show the track number and index time in
minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track
one.
Seek
Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on
the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or return to the
beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the
first 10 seconds of the current selection.
EJT — Eject
Press the EJT button and the disc will unload and move
to the entrance for easy removal. The unit will switch to
the radio mode.
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.
The disc can be ejected with the radio OFF.
FF/TUNE/RW
Press FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to
fast forward until FF is released. The RW ( Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RND — Random Play
Press the RND button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press TUNE FF to fast forward through the tracks. Press
the FF button a second time to stop the fast forward
feature. If TUNE RW is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
189
CD/DVD Changer Operation
Press the MODE button to select between the CD player
and the optional remote CD/DVD changer.
Time
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed CD or DVD playing time to time of day.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files, however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Supported media (disc types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW.
Supported medium formats (file systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
4
190
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of directory levels: 15
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders: 100
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 file formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MPEG Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
24, 22.05, 16
Bit rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
191
Playback of MP3 files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
4
192
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For MP3 Audio
Play)
SEEK Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Pressing the SEEK + button plays the next MP3 File.
Pressing the SEEK ⫺ button plays the beginning of the
MP3 file. Pressing the button within the first ten seconds
plays the previous file.
INFO Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Press and INFO button while playing MP3 disc. The
radio scrolls through the following TAG information:
Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
RW/FF (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Press the FF side of the button to move forward through
the MP3 selection. Press the RW side of the button to
move back through the MP3 selection.
AM/FM Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Switches back to Radio mode.
RND Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Pressing this button plays files randomly.
DIR Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Press the DIR Button to display folders, when playing an
MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure. Press DISC
up (button 1) or DISC down (button 5) to move through
the folders. Press the SET button to select a folder
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to Hands Free Phone section of the Owner’s
Manual.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s
Manual.
193
SALES CODE RBP—AM & FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER, CD PLAYER,
AND OPTIONAL CD/DVD CHANGER CONTROLS
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES威) (If Equipped)
Refer to 6 Disc CD/DVD Changer (RDV) section of the
Owner’s Manual.
4
RBP Radio
194
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio Operation
Power/Volume Control
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn the
volume control to the right to increase the volume.
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is supplied through
the ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position
to operate the radio.
PTY (Program Type) Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time
out the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing the PTY button
within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to
be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast PTY information.
Toggle the PTY button to select the following format
types:
Program Type
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Information
Jazz
Foreign Language
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Radio Display
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Inform
Jazz
Language
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
Radio Display
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM and Satellite (if
equipped) modes.
The radio display will flash “SEEK” and the selected PTY
program type when searching for the next PTY station. If
no station is found with the selected PTY program type,
the radio will return to the last preset station.
195
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
Pressing PTY, then SCAN will scan the FM Band and stop
at all RDS stations that broadcast the station type. Each
RDS station will be played for a 5 second scan once
around the FM Band and stop at the last station. The PTY
icon will then turn off.
Seek
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
station in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of the
button to seek up and the bottom to seek down. The
radio will remain tuned to the new station until you
make another selection. Holding the button in will bypass stations without stopping until you release it.
4
196
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Scan
Press and release the SCAN button to search for the next
station in either the AM or FM mode. The radio will
pause for 5 seconds at each listenable station before
continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the
SCAN button a second time.
Tune
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or
decrease the frequency. If you press and hold the button,
the radio will continue to tune until you release the
button. The frequency will be displayed and continuously updated while the button is pressed.
Balance — BAL
The Balance control adjusts the left-to-right speaker balance. Press the BAL button in and it will pop out. Adjust
the balance and push the button back in.
Fade
The Fade control provides for balance between the front
and rear speakers. Press the FADE button in and it will
pop out. Adjust the balance and push the button back in.
Tone Control
The tone controls affect the BASS and TREBLE frequency
bands. Each is controlled by a slider control with a detent
at the mid position. Moving a control up or down
increases or decreases amplification of the band. The mid
position provides a balanced output.
AM/FM Selection
Press the AM/FM button to toggle between AM and FM
mode. The operating mode will be displayed next to the
station frequency. The display will show “ST” when a
stereo station is received (FM only).
To Set The Radio Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the
“1–5” button you wish to lock onto this station and press
and release that button. If a button is not selected within
5 seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will
continue to play but will not be locked into push-button
memory.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM
stations to be locked into push-button memory. The
stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the push-button twice.
Time
Press the TIME button to change the display between
radio frequency and time.
197
To set the clock, use a ballpoint pen or similar object to
press the hour (H) or minute (M) buttons on the radio,
The time setting will increase each time you press the
button. Press any other button to exit from the clock
setting mode.
General Information
This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
4
198
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tape Player Operation
Insert the cassette with the exposed tape side toward the
right and the mechanical action of the player will gently
pull the cassette into the play position.
Seek
Press the SEEK button up for the next selection on the
tape and down to return to the beginning of the current
selection.
NOTE: When subjected to extremely cold temperatures,
the tape mechanism may require a few minutes to warm
up for proper operation. Sometimes poor playback may
be experienced due to a defective cassette tape. Clean and
demagnetize the tape heads at least twice a year.
Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track
number to skip forward or backward 1 to 7 selections.
Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection, twice to
move 2 selections, etc. the display will show the total
number of times the SEEK button was pushed. The SEEK
function will be cancelled by pressing either the FF/RW
or AM/FM button.
Tape Side — ⵜ⌬/PTY
Pressing the ⵜ⌬ button during tape mode will cause the
other side of the tape to be played. The display will
confirm the selected tape play direction. The time is
always displayed.
Tape
Press the TAPE button to select the Tape mode.
Fast Forward — FF
Press the FF button up momentarily to advance the tape
in the direction that it is playing. The tape will advance
until the button is pressed again or the end of the tape is
reached. At the end of the tape, the tape will play in the
opposite direction.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rewind — RW
Press the RW button down momentarily to reverse the
tape direction. The tape will rewind until the button is
pressed again or until the beginning of the tape is
reached. At the beginning of the tape, the tape will play
in the opposite direction.
EJT Tape
Press the EJT TAPE button and the cassette will disengage and eject from the radio.
Metal Tape Selection (70µs)
If a standard 70 µ (metal) tape is inserted into the player,
the player will automatically select the correct equalization.
Pinch Roller Release
If ignition power or the radio ON/OFF switch are turned
off, the pinch roller will automatically retract to protect
199
the tape from any damage. When power is restored to the
tape player, the pinch roller will automatically reengage
and the tape will resume play.
Dolby Noise Reduction
The Dolby Noise Reduction System* is on whenever the tape player is on, but may be switched
on/off.
To turn the Dolby Noise Reduction System on/off: Press
the Dolby NR button (button 2) after you insert the tape.
The NR light in the display will go off when the Dolby
System is off.
* ”Dolby” noise reduction manufactured under license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
4
200
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CD Player Operation
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position and the volume control ON before the CD player
will operate.
Inserting The Compact Disc
You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio off,
the display will show CD and the time of day will be
displayed.
If the power is on, the unit will switch from radio to CD
mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The
display will show the track number and index time in
minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track
one.
Seek
Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on
the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or return to the
beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the
first second of the current selection.
Scan
Press the SCAN button to play 10 seconds of each
selection. Press the SCAN button a second time to cancel
this feature.
EJT CD
Press the EJT CD button and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. The unit will
switch to the radio mode.
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The unit will continue in radio mode.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition off.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
FF/TUNE/RW
Press FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to
fast forward until FF is released. The RW (Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
Random Play — RND/Program Button 4
Press the RND (button 4) button while the CD is playing
to activate Random Play. This feature plays the selections
on the compact disc in random order to provide an
interesting change of pace.
201
To select Satellite Radio (if equipped), press the MODE
button until the word SIRIUS™ appears. The following
will be displayed in this order: After three seconds, the
current channel name and number will be displayed for
five seconds. The current program type and channel
number will then be displayed for five seconds. The
current channel name and number will then be displayed
until an action occurs. A CD or tape may remain in the
player while in the Satellite Radio mode.
Press the top of the SEEK button to move to the next
randomly selected track.
Time
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed CD playing time to time of day.
Press the RND (button 4) button a second time to stop
Random Play.
CD/DVD Changer Operation — If Equipped
MODE
Press the MODE button to select between the CD player,
remote CD/DVD changer (if equipped), or satellite radio
(if equipped).
MODE
Press the MODE button to select between the CD player,
and the CD/DVD changer (if equipped).
4
202
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Disc Up/Program Button 1
Press the DISC (button 1) button to play the next available disc.
Disc Down/Program Button 5
Press the DISC (button 5) button to play the previous
disc.
Random Play — RND/Program Button 4
Press the RND (button 4) button while the CD is playing
to activate Random Play. This feature plays the selections
on the currently playing compact disc in random order to
provide an interesting change of pace.
Seek
Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on
the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or return to the
beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the
first second of the current selection.
Press the top of the SEEK button to move to the next
randomly selected track.
Press the RND (button 4) button a second time to stop
Random Play.
FF/RW — TUNE
Press and hold the FF button for fast forward. Press and
hold the RW button for fast reverse. The audio output can
be heard when fast forward and fast reverse are activated.
Time
Press the TIME button to switch between time of day and
CD track time.
Scan
Press the SCAN button to play 10 seconds of each track.
Press the SCAN button a second time to cancel the
feature.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
203
6 DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (RDV) — IF EQUIPPED
The Rear Seat Audio/Video System allows passengers to
listen to a CD or DVD from the 6 disc CD/DVD changer
through wireless headphones, while the front seat passengers listen to either AM/FM, Cassette or CDs from the
radio speakers. A remote control is provided for functions such as changing tracks or DVD functions, as well
as selecting discs loaded in the 6 disc CD/DVD changer
while listening to the Rear Audio/Video System.
The Rear Seat Audio/Video System may be available in a
base and premium version. The premium version includes a six disc changer, remote control and two sets of
wireless headphones. The base version includes a single
disc changer and remote control.
The CD/DVD Changer will play CD-R, CD-RW, CDAudio and DVD Video disc formats.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position before the CD/DVD changer will operate.
4
6 Disc CD/DVD Changer
Operating Instructions — CD/DVD Changer
Loading The CD/DVD Changer
The premium version has a multi-disc changer,
and will accept up to six discs. The base
version is a single-disc changer, and will only
accept one disc.
204
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To insert disc(s) into the changer, follow the instructions
shown:
1. On vehicles equipped with the premium version,
select and press any numbered button without an illuminated light above it.
2. Gently insert the disc with the label facing up while
the light below the loading slot is illuminated. On
vehicles equipped with the premium version the light
above the chosen button will also be flashing, indicating
which numbered position the disc will be loaded into.
The disc will automatically be pulled into the CD/DVD
changer.
3. Upon insertion, the disc will begin to play, and the
light below the loading slot will turn off. On vehicles
equipped with the premium version the light above the
chosen button will remain illuminated.
4. Repeat the process for loading any additional CD/
DVDs into the premium version multi-disc changer. The
CD/DVD changer will stop while additional CD/DVDs
are loaded.
If the radio volume control is ON, the unit will switch
from radio to CD/DVD mode. If the DVD supports the
autoplay feature, play will begin automatically in approximately 10 seconds, after the DVD disc menu is
displayed. If the DVD does not play automatically, press
the ENTER button on the remote control or on the side of
the video screen to select play from the menu options.
The radio display will show the chapter number and
index time in hours and minutes of the DVD, or the track
number, minutes and second of the CD.
NOTE:
• You may eject a disc with the radio OFF.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the DVD will automatically be pulled into the
DVD changer and the display will show the time of
day.
• It is recommended to label home made burned discs
with a permanent marker instead of adhesive labels.
These types of labels may become loose and cause the
disc to be stuck in the DVD player. This may cause
permanent damage to the DVD mechanism.
EJECT (EJT) Button
If there is a disc in the changer, press the EJT button and
the disc will eject. If you do not remove the disc within 10
seconds, it will be reloaded and the display will show
PAUSE. The radio mode will continue to operate.
205
To eject additional discs from the premium version
multi-disc changer, first select the numbered button
where the disc is located and then press the EJT button.
The disc can be ejected with the radio OFF.
Operating Instructions — Remote Control
NOTE: Aim the remote control at the DVD changer
located on the center of the instrument panel and press
the desired button. Direct sunlight or objects blocking the
line of sight may affect the function of the remote control.
4
206
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Remote Control
Remote Control Buttons
1. Headphone Transmitter
2. Menu Up/Next Track/Chapter
3. Menu Left/Fast Rewind
4. Return
5. Setup
6. Pause/Play
7. Mute
8. Display
9. Mode
10. Program Down - Previous Disc
11. Program Up - Next Disc
12. Slow
13. Stop
14. Menu
15. Menu Down/Previous Track/Chapter
16. Menu Right/Fast Forward
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Remote Control Buttons
17. Enter
18. Light
Headphone Transmitter Button (1)
After a disc is inserted into the DVD changer, both the
headphone transmitter button (1) on the remote control
and the power button on the headphones must be turned
ON before sound can be heard from the headphones. On
some radios the headphone symbol will flash for approximately 5 seconds in the radio display, indicating the
headphones are in use.
ARROW Buttons (2, 3, 15, 16)
These buttons only function in DVD video mode. Use the
arrow buttons to toggle through the DVD disc menu
screen options.
207
RTN Button (4)
This button only functions in DVD video mode. Press this
button to return to the previous menu when in the DVD
disc menu mode.
SETUP Button (5)
This button only functions in DVD video mode. Press the
button after pressing the STOP button to access the DVD
changer set up menu. Use the right and left arrows to
move between tabs for language, rating, mark, audio and
aspect. Use the up and down arrows to move between
options within each tab.
To change an item highlighted in blue, press ENTER. This
should cause the highlight to turn yellow. Again, using
the up and down arrows will cause the arrow to move up
or down. Once the arrow is on the desired selection, press
ENTER. When finished, press setup or play to return to
playing the DVD or Menu to return to the DVD disc
menu.
4
208
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PAUSE/PLAY Button (6)
This button only functions in DVD video mode. Press this
button once to pause the video, press a second time to
play the video.
MUTE Button (7)
No function.
DISP Button (8)
This button only functions in DVD video mode. When a
DVD video is playing, press this button to display the
play menu options.
MODE Button (9)
No Function
PROG UP/DOWN Buttons (10, 11)
PROG UP selects the next disc loaded in the changer.
PROG DOWN selects the previous disc loaded in the
changer.
SLOW Button (12)
This button only functions in DVD video mode. Press this
button to advance the video. If the DVD is paused,
pressing this button will advance the video frame by
frame.
STOP Button (13)
This button only functions in DVD video mode. Press this
button to stop the DVD.
MENU Button (14)
This button only functions in DVD video mode. Press this
button to select the DVD disc menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NEXT/PREV Buttons (2, 15)
Press the up arrow or the NEXT button for the next
chapter or track on the disc. Press the down arrow or
PREV button to return to the beginning of the current
chapter or track. Press the down arrow or PREV button
twice within two seconds to return to the previous
chapter or track. Each press of the NEXT/PREV button
up or down will toggle through the chapters or tracks.
FF/RW Buttons (3, 16)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) once and the CD/DVD
changer will begin to fast forward until the FF button is
released. The RW (Reverse) button works in a similar
manner.
209
ENTER Button (17)
This button only functions in DVD video mode. Use the
ENTER button to enter selections from the menu screens.
Use the arrow buttons to toggle through the menu screen
options.
Light Button (18)
Pressing this button illuminates the buttons on the remote control.
Remote Control Battery Service
• To replace the batteries for the remote control slide the
cover rearward.
The replacement batteries for the remote control are two
AAA batteries.
4
210
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions — Video Screen
Push up on the release button to lower the video screen.
2. Enter Button
This button will enter the selection from the
on-screen menu.
3. Brightness Button
Changes the brightness of the screen picture.
Lowering Video Screen
1. Screen Width Button
Changes the width of the screen picture.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
211
Operating Instructions — Headphones
4
Video Screen Controls
Headphone Controls
1. Power Button
2. Volume Control
3. Power Indicator
212
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Power Button
Pressing the power button will turn the headphones
ON/OFF. An indicator light will illuminate on the headphone earpiece to indicate the headphones are ON.
NOTE:
• The headphones will turn off automatically in approximately 3 minutes if they lose the signal form the
system or when the radio or rear audio/video system
is turned off.
Volume Control
Rotate the volume control to adjust the volume to the
desired listening level.
Headphone Battery Service
• Press the button at the bottom of each headphone
earpiece and lift the cover upward.
Headphone Battery Service
• Replace the battery in each earpiece and reinstall the
cover. The headphones require two AAA batteries.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference and (2) This device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
If you do not hear sound coming from the headphones,
check for the following conditions:
1. Rear Seat Audio/Video System and headphones are
on. Press the headphone transmitter button (1) on the
remote control and the power button on the headphones.
An indicator light will illuminate on the headphone
earpiece to indicate the headphones are ON.
2. Weak batteries in the headphones.
213
3. Direct sunlight or objects blocking the line of sight
between the headphone transmitter on the video screen
and the headphones.
Operating Instructions — MP3 Player, Portable
Walkman
An MP3 player can be connected to the audio system.
Connect the cables to the RCA jacks located on the front
of the CD/DVD changer.
NOTE: Follow the manufactures instructions for the
correct colors when connecting the RCA cables.
Operating Instructions — Video
Games/Camcorders
A video game unit or camcorder can be connected to the
rear audio/video system. Connect the cables to the RCA
jacks located on the front of the CD/DVD changer.
4
214
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: To operate a video game unit a DC to AC
adapter may be required, plug the adapter into any
power outlet.
Follow the manufactures instructions for the correct
colors when connecting the RCA cables.
NOTE: MP3 player’s, video game systems, camcorders
connected to the RCA jacks and CD’s or DVD’s inserted
into the CD/DVD changer can be heard through the
headphones.
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED
Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satellite Radio. This service offers up to 100 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
System Activation
To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service, call the
toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site
at www.sirius.com. Please have the following information available when activating your system:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Credit card information.
3. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ENS/SID)
The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio
system. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following
steps:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ESN/SID Access With RBB, RAH and RBK Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the Tape Eject or CD Eject (depending on the radio type) and Time buttons simultaneously
for 3 seconds. The first four digits of the twelve-digit
ESN/SID number will be displayed. Press the SEEK UP
button to display the next four digits. Continue to press
the SEEK UP button until all twelve ESN/SID digits have
been displayed. The SEEK DOWN will page down until
the first four digits are displayed. The radio will exit the
ESN/SID mode when any other button is pushed, the
ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any
button was pushed.
ESN/SID Access With RBP, RBU, RAZ, RB1 and
RBQ Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/SID numbers will be displayed. The radio will exit the ESN/SID
215
mode when any other button is pushed, the ignition is
turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button
was pushed.
Selecting Satellite Mode in RBB, RAH and RBK
Radios
Press the MODE button repeatedly until ⬙S A⬙ appears in
the display. A CD or tape may remain in the radio while
in the Satellite radio mode.
Selecting Satellite Mode in RBP, RBU, RAZ, RB1
and RBQ Radios
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word
⬙SIRIUS⬙ appears in the display. These radios will also
display the following:
• After 3 seconds, the current channel name and channel
number will be displayed for 5 seconds.
• The current program type and channel number will
then be displayed for 5 seconds.
4
216
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The current channel number will then be displayed
until an action occurs.
A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the
Satellite radio mode.
Selecting a Channel
Press and release the SEEK or TUNE buttons to search for
the next channel. Press the top of the button to search up
and the bottom of the button to search down. Holding the
TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until
the button is released.
Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) to
automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The
radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before
moving on to the next channel. The word ⬙SCAN⬙ will
appear in the display between each channel change. Press
the SCAN button a second time to stop the search.
NOTE: Channels that may contain objectionable content
can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888-5397474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblocking. Please have your ESN/SID information available.
Storing and Selecting Pre-Set Channels
In addition to the 10 AM and 10 FM pre-set stations, you
may also commit 10 satellite stations to push button
memory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will not
erase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow the
memory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio.
Using the PTY (Program Type) Button (if
equipped)
Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your
radio.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PTY Button ⴖSCANⴖ
When the desired program type is obtained, press the
⬙SCAN⬙ button within five seconds. The radio will play 7
seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next
channel of the selected program type. Press the ⬙SCAN⬙
button a second time to stop the search.
NOTE: Pressing the ⬙SEEK⬙ or ⬙SCAN⬙ button while
performing a music type scan will change the channel by
one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory
button during a music type scan, will call up the memory
channel and stop the search.
PTY Button ⴖSEEKⴖ
When the desired program is obtained, press the ⬙SEEK⬙
button within five seconds. The channel will change to
the next channel that matches the program type selected.
217
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items should be
placed as far forward as possible. Do not place items
directly on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons.
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
4
218
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
The following describes the left hand rocker switch
operation in each mode:
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel at the 3 and 9 o’clock
positions.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
The right hand rocker switch has a push button in the
center and controls the volume and mode of the sound
system. Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase
the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch
will decrease the volume. Pressing the center button
changes the operation of the radio from AM to FM to
Tape or CD mode depending on which radio is in the
vehicle.
The button located in the center of the left hand switch
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have
programmed in the radio pre-set push-button.
The left hand rocker switch has a push button in the
center. The function of the left hand switch is different
depending on which mode you are in.
Tape Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
selection on the cassette. Pressing the bottom of the
switch once will go to the beginning of the current
selection or to the beginning of the previous selection if it
is within the first 5 seconds of the current selection.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second selection, three times, it will play the third, etc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The button in the center of the left hand switch has no
function in this mode.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left hand switch has no
function in this mode.
219
RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Broadcast Signals
Your new radio will provide excellent reception under
most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car
radios have performance limitations, due to mobile operation and natural phenomena, which might lead you to
believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help
you understand and save you concern about these “apparent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or
two about the transmission and reception of radio signals.
Two Types of Signals
There are two basic types of radio signals... AM or
Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound
causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to
vary... and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the
frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.
4
220
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electrical Disturbances
Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during
transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude,
and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They
interfere very little with the frequency variations that
carry the FM signal.
AM Reception
AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception
can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines
and neon signs.
FM Reception
Because FM transmission is based on frequency variations, interference that consists of amplitude variations
can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,
which is the major feature of FM radio.
NOTE: On vehicles so equipped the radio, steering
wheel radio controls and 6 disc CD/DVD changer will
remain active for up to 45 seconds after the ignition
switch has been turned off. Opening a vehicle front door
will cancel this feature.
CASSETTE TAPE AND PLAYER MAINTENANCE
To keep the cassette tapes and player in good condition,
take the following precautions:
1. Do not use cassette tapes longer than C-90; otherwise,
sound quality and tape durability will be greatly diminished.
2. Keep the cassette tape in its case to protect from
slackness and dust when it is not in use.
3. Keep the cassette tape away from direct sunlight, heat
and magnetic fields such as the radio speakers.
4. Before inserting a tape, make sure that the label is
adhering flat to the cassette.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
221
5. A loose tape should be corrected before use. To rewind
a loose tape, insert the eraser end of a pencil into the tape
drive gear and twist the pencil in the required directions.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep the CD/DVD discs in good condition, take the
following precautions:
Maintain your cassette tape player. The head and capstan
shaft in the cassette player can pick up dirt or tape
deposits each time a cassette is played. The result of
deposits on the capstan shaft may cause the tape to wrap
around and become lodged in the tape transport. The
other adverse condition is low or “muddy” sound from
one or both channels, as if the treble tone control were
turned all the way down. To prevent this, you should
periodically clean the head with a commercially available
WET cleaning cassette.
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
As preventive maintenance, clean the head about every
30 hours of use. If you wait until the head becomes very
dirty (noticeably poor sound), it may not be possible to
remove all deposits with a simple WET cleaning cassette.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to the
disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
4
222
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being On in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
The navigation DVD unit is located in the underfloor
storage compartment in the rear cargo area. A single disc
containing map information for the entire United States
and parts of Canada is stored in the DVD unit. Updated
DVD’s are available from your authorized dealer.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The navigation system provides maps, turn identification, selection menus and instructions for selecting a
variety of destinations and routes. The buttons to operate
the system are located on the instrument panel next to the
analog clock.
Refer to your Navigation User’s Manual for detailed
operating instructions.
Navigation CD Location
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To replace the navigation map DVD lift the storage bin
cover and liner in the rear cargo area, press the eject
button and the disc will eject. Gently insert the new disc
into the DVD unit with the label facing up. The disc will
automatically be pulled into the DVD unit.
223
Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
4
Manual Heating and A/C Controls
Power Button
When the “POWER” button is pressed the indicator will
illuminate and the blower will run at the speed selected
by the front blower control. When the button is pressed a
224
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
second time the indicator light turns off, the blower will
turn off and the system will be positioned in the recirculation mode.
Blower Control
The Blower controls the amount of air delivered to
the passenger compartment. There are four blower
speeds.
Dual Zone Temperature Control — If Equipped
With the Dual Zone Temperature Control System, each
front seat occupant can independently control the temperature of air coming from the outlets on their side of
the vehicle.
The fan speed increases as you
move the control clockwise.
Dual Zone Temperature Control
This is accomplished by having a separate temperature
control lever for both the driver and front seat passenger.
The blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures
while the red area indicates warmer temperatures.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
225
Panel Mode
Mode Control
The mode control allows you to
choose from several patterns of air
distribution.
4
NOTE: To improve your selection choices, the system
allows you to operate at intermediate positions between
the major modes. These intermediate positions are identified by the small dots.
Panel Outlets
226
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. Moving the air vane knob on the center
outlets down, will close off the air flow from the center
outlets. The thumbwheel next to the outboard outlets can
be rotated to regulate or shut off the air flow from these
outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Outlets
Air comes from both the instrument panel outlets, floor
outlets and defrost. A slight amount of air is also directed
through the side window demister outlets.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
227
NOTE: In many temperature lever positions, the bilevel mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demister
outlets.
Floor Mode
Mix Mode
4
Floor Outlets
Mix Outlets
228
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or snowy
conditions. It allows you to stay comfortable while keeping the windshield clear.
Defrost Mode
Air comes from the windshield and side window demist
outlets. Use this setting when necessary to defrost your
windshield and side windows.
NOTE: For improved safety, the compressor is activated
and the recirculation mode is deactivated when Mix or
Defrost modes are selected. This is done to assist in
drying the air and it will help in keeping the windows
from fogging.
Manual Air Conditioning Operation
To turn on the air conditioning, set the front
blower control to any speed and press the A/C
button which is located next to the recirculation
button. An indicator light on the A/C button shows that
the air conditioning is on.
NOTE: The indicator light in the “POWER” button must
be on for the climate control system to operate.
Defrost Outlets
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
229
Cool dehumidified air comes through the outlets selected
by the Mode Control. To turn off the air conditioning,
press the A/C button a second time. The indicator light
will turn off.
Economy Mode
If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn
off the indicator light, and the A/C compressor. Move the
temperature control lever to the desired temperature.
NOTE:
• The compressor will not engage until the engine has
been running for a few seconds.
Recirculation Control
Press the recirculation button to recirculate the
air inside the vehicle. This is located next to the
A/C button. An indicator light on the button
shows that air is being recirculated. Use the
recirculation mode to rapidly cool the inside of the
vehicle. The recirculation mode can also be used to
temporarily block out outside odors, smoke, and dust.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the A/C air filter and the front of the
A/C condenser for an accumulation of dirt or insects.
The A/C condenser is located in front of the radiator.
The A/C air filter is located under the instrument
panel on the passenger side.
• Fabric type fascia protectors tend to block the amount
of air to the condenser and may reduce air conditioning performance.
NOTE:
• When the ignition switch is turned OFF, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
4
230
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
mode is not allowed in the Mix and Defrost modes to
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation
will be disabled automatically if these modes are
selected.
• If the recirculation button is pressed while in the Mix
or Defrost mode, the indicator light in the recirculation
button will flash 3 times indicating that recirculation is
not allowed.
A/C Recirculation Programming
The recirculation control is programmed to cancel the
recirculation mode when the ignition key is turned OFF
and will reset to outside air mode when the ignition key
is turned ON. The frequent use of outside air will help
keep odors from building up within the air conditionerheater housing. It is recommended that the recirculation
mode be used as little as possible, especially in humid
climates.
For hot and dry climates, or people who are allergic to
pollen and find frequent use of the recirculation mode
necessary, the recirculation mode can be programmed to
not automatically reset to the outside mode by using the
following procedures:
• Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
• Set the mode control to “PANEL”.
• Depress and hold in the “POWER” button.
• Start the engine, and continue to hold in the “POWER”
button until the indicator light starts flashing repeatedly.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Press the recirculation button until the indicator light
remains lit.
• The selection will be stored when the ignition switch is
turned OFF or if the “POWER” button is pressed.
If the recirculation indicator light is lit, the recirculation
mode will not reset when the engine is started. If the
recirculation indicator light is not lit, the recirculation
mode will reset to the outside air mode when the engine
is started. The programmed status can be changed back
and forth by following the above mentioned procedure.
As additional protection against odor build-up in the air
conditioner-heater housing, the recirculation control will
automatically bring in a small amounts of outside air, if
the recirculation feature is on for more than 10 minutes.
You can disable this feature by using one of the following
procedures:
231
1. Pressing the recirculation button twice within two
seconds will temporarily disable this feature. When the
ignition switch is turned OFF, the recirculation mode will
be enabled the next time the ignition switch is turned
ON.
2. You can disable this feature permanently by following
the procedure below:
• Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
• Set the mode control to “BI-LEVEL”.
• Depress and hold in the “POWER” button.
• Start the engine, and continue to hold in the
“POWER” button until the indicator light starts
flashing repeatedly.
• Press the recirculation button until the indicator
light remains lit.
4
232
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The selection will be stored when the ignition switch
is turned OFF or if the “POWER” button is pressed.
front seat occupant comfort, even under changing outside weather conditions.
If the recirculation indicator light is lit, the recirculation
mode is enabled. If the recirculation indicator light is not
lit, the recirculation mode is OFF. The programmed status
can be changed back and forth by following the above
mentioned procedure.
Dual-Zone Automatic Temperature Control
The Dual Zone Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
System automatically maintains the interior comfort level
desired by the driver and front seat passenger. This is
accomplished by using two infrared sensors located in
the center of the instrument panel. The two infrared
sensors independently measure the surface temperature
of the driver and front seat passenger. Based on the
sensor input, the system automatically adjusts the air
temperature, the airflow volume, the airflow distribution, and amount of inside air recirculation to maintain
Dual-Zone Automatic Temperature Control
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To operate the system, press either the ⬙AUTO HI⬙ or
⬙AUTO LO⬙ buttons. The system now automatically
regulates the heating and air conditioning system including blower speed, outlet air temperature, and airflow
distribution through the various outlets within the instrument panel. Using the ⬙TEMP⬙ buttons, adjust the
temperature you would like the system to maintain.
When the system is set to your comfort level, it is not
necessary to change the settings. You will experience the
greatest efficiency by allowing the system to function
automatically. The system will operate fully automatically in either ⬙AUTO HI⬙ or ⬙AUTO LO⬙. The ⬙AUTO
LO⬙ setting will limit the maximum fan speed and should
be used when more quiet operation is desired. Use the
⬙AUTO HI⬙ setting when the quickest cool-down or
warm-up performance is desired.
233
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric by
selecting the US/M customer programmable feature.
Refer to the “Electronic Vehicle Information CenterCustomer Programmable Features” in Section 3 of this
manual.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
off and “DELAY” will appear in the display until the
engine warms up. An estimate of the time remaining
until the “DELAY” is complete will appear periodically
in the display. However, the fan will engage immediately
if the defrost mode is selected or by pushing the blower
switch and manually adjusting the fan speed.
4
234
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
This feature may be disabled using the following procedure:
• Press and hold the Heated Rear Window and Auto LO
buttons for 5 seconds.
• The “DELAY” symbol will flash to indicate that the
feature as been disabled.
This feature may be enabled using the following procedure:
• Press and hold the Heated Rear Window and Auto HI
buttons for 5 seconds.
• The “DELAY” symbol will flash to indicate that the
feature as been enabled.
Power Button
This button turns the entire system ON/OFF. When the
system is turned on it will return to the previous settings.
Dual/Single Zone Operation
When ⬙DUAL⬙ is displayed in the ATC control unit, the
driver and passenger air outlet temperatures can be
individually adjusted from the two independent ⬙TEMP⬙
buttons. When a front seat passenger is not present,
pressing the ⬙DUAL⬙ button will match the passenger’s
temperature setting to the driver’s temperature setting.
This will help equalize air outlet temperatures across the
left and right side of the instrument panel. The outside
temperature will replace the passenger’s temperature
setting in the display. Pressing the ⬙DUAL⬙ button a
second time or adjusting the passenger’s ⬙TEMP⬙ button
will return the system to dual independent temperature
operation.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The indicator light in both the ⬙AUTO HI⬙ or
⬙AUTO LO⬙ buttons will turn off when the system is
being used in the manual mode. The fan speed, airflow
distribution, and outside air/recirculated air can be
manually adjusted.
NOTE: Each of these features operate independently
from each other. If any one feature is controlled manually,
the remaining features will continue to operate automatically.
235
The front blower control can be set to any fixed
blower speed by pressing the rocker switch up or
down. This allows the front occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the auto
mode. The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until
additional speeds are selected or until either the ⬙AUTO
HI⬙ or ⬙AUTO LO⬙ buttons are pressed. The system will
continue to automatically adjust air temperature and
airflow distribution.
The operator can also select the direction of the air by
pressing the mode control rocker switch located to the
left of the A/C button and selecting one of the following
positions.
4
236
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. Moving the knob up, down, left, or right will
direct the air accordingly. The thumbwheel next to each
outlet can be rotated to reduce or shut off the air flow
from these outlets.
Panel Mode
Panel Outlets
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
237
Air comes from both the instrument panel outlets and
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is also directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the bi-level
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
4
Bi-Level Outlets
238
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Floor Mode
Mix Mode
Floor Outlets
Mix Outlets
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demister
outlets.
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demist outlets. This mode is not used when operating in
either ⬙AUTO HI⬙ or ⬙AUTO LO⬙. This mode should be
used when airflow to the floor and windshield is desired.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
239
NOTE: While operating in ⬙AUTO HI⬙ or ⬙AUTO LO⬙,
the system will not automatically sense the presence fog,
mist, or ice on the windshield. The defrost button must be
pressed to clear the windshield and side glass.
Defrost Mode
Depress the “A/C” button to turn on and off the
air conditioning during manual operation only.
Cool dehumidified air comes through the outlets
selected by the Mode Control. To turn off the air conditioning, press the A/C button a second time. The A/C
symbol in the display will turn off.
Defrost Outlets
Air comes from the windshield and side window demist
outlets. Use this setting when necessary to defrost your
windshield and side windows. If a fog or mist on the
windshield or side glass starts to impair visibility, press
the front blower button and increase the fan speed to
maximum.
NOTE: If a fog or mist appears on the windshield or
side glass, press the “A/C” button to engage the compressor or press the defrost button. If a fog or mist on the
windshield or side glass starts to impair visibility, press
the front blower button and increase the fan speed to
maximum.
4
240
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Recirculation Control
When the outside air contains smoke, odors,
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the recirculation button. The recirculation mode should only be used temporarily. The recirculate symbol will illuminate in the display when this
button is selected. Push the button a second time to allow
outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of the recirculation mode
may lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
mode is not allowed in the Mix and Defrost modes to
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will
be disabled automatically if these modes are selected.
A/C Recirculation Programming
The recirculation control is programmed to cancel the
recirculation mode when the ignition key is turned OFF
and will reset to the outside air mode when the ignition
key is turned “ON”. The frequent use of outside air will
help keep odors from building up within the air
conditioner-heater housing. It is recommended that the
recirculation mode be used as little as possible, especially
in humid climates.
For hot and dry climates, or people who are allergic to
pollen and find frequent use of the recirculation mode
necessary, the recirculation mode can be programmed to
not automatically reset to the outside mode by using the
following procedures:
• Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
• Press and hold the recirculation button.
• While holding the recirculation button, turn the ignition switch to the “RUN” position.
• Continue holding the recirculation button for 4 seconds, then release.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The recirculation control is now programmed so that the
recirculation mode will not reset to the outside air mode
when the engine is restarted. The recirculation programming can be changed back by repeating this procedure.
Rear Fan Operation
To operate the rear fan, press the ⬙REAR⬙ button. The first
time this button is pressed the ⬙REAR AUTO⬙ display
will illuminate indicating that the rear fan speed is
automatically controlled. To manually control the rear
fan speed, press the ⬙REAR⬙ button again and only
⬙REAR⬙ will illuminate in the display. This allows the rear
seat occupants to control the rear fan speed using the
switch located in the center console between the second
row seats. By pressing the ⬙REAR⬙ button a third time,
the rear fan will shut off.
When the ATC display reads ⬙REAR AUTO⬙ or when the
rear fan is off, the switch located in the center console
between the second row seats is not functional. When the
241
ATC display reads ⬙REAR⬙, only the rear seat occupants
can control the rear fan speed from the rear switch. When
in the “REAR” mode, the rear occupants can set the rear
switch to any fan speed including ⬙OFF⬙, or ⬙AUTO⬙.
While in the ⬙AUTO⬙ position, the rear fan speed will be
automatically controlled.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A 50% solution of ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended. Refer
to section 7, Maintenance Procedures, of this manual for
proper coolant selection.
4
242
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Winter Operation
To insure the best possible heater and defroster performance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration of coolant is used. Refer to section 7, Maintenance
Procedures, of this manual for proper coolant selection.
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh
air and high blower setting. This will insure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild rainy
or humid weather. To clear the windows, use the A/C
button to reduce the humidity inside the vehicle.
Fogging on the inside of the windshield can be quickly
removed by pressing the defrost button and increasing
the blower speed.
Do not use the Recirculation mode without the A/C
button for long periods as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Before driving, always make sure the air intake located
directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions
such as leaves, ice, or snow, which could reduce airflow
and/or plug the water drain tube inside the plenum.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust, pollen and
some odors from the air. Strong odors can not be totally
filtered out. Refer to section 7 “Air Conditioning” for
filter replacement instructions.
Outside Temperature Display
The outside temperature can be shown in the ATC
display by pressing the ⬙OUTSIDE TEMP⬙ button. After
pressing this button, the front seat passenger’s temperature setting display will be replaced with the current
outside temperature. Press the ⬙OUTSIDE TEMP⬙ button
again or press the passenger’s ⬙TEMP⬙ button to return
the display to the passenger’s temperature setting.
Electric Rear Window Defroster
Press this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated side mirrors. A light in
243
the button will illuminate to indicate the rear window
defroster is ON. The defroster automatically turns off
after about 10 minutes of operation.
CAUTION!
To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the
rear window defroster, do not use scrapers, sharp
instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window.
Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm
water.
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
▫ AutoStick Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
▫ AutoStick General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 250
䡵 All Wheel Drive — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock System . . . . . . . 251
䡵 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
▫ Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
▫ Four Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . 252
䡵 AutoStick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
䡵 Traction Control — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
䡵 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
5
246
STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
䡵 All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped . . . . . . . 281
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . 267
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System — If Equipped . . . 281
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 268
▫ 1,2,3, Or 4 Tire(s) Low Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 282
䡵 Tires—General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
▫ 1,2,3, Or 4 Tire(s) High Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 282
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
▫ Service Tire Pressure System/See Owner’s
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 276
▫ Limited Use Spare — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 277
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
▫ Alignment And Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
STARTING AND OPERATING
247
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . . 292
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
䡵 Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . 298
䡵 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
Ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . . 292
5
248
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
CAUTION!
Long periods of engine idling, especially at high
engine speeds, can cause excessive exhaust temperatures which can damage your vehicle. Do not leave
your vehicle unattended with the engine running.
WARNING!
Do not leave animals or children inside parked
vehicles in hot weather; interior heat build up may
cause serious injury or death.
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
Normal Starting
Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator
pedal. Turn the key to the “START” position and release
when the engine starts. If the engine has not started
within 3 seconds, slightly depress the accelerator pedal
while continuing to crank. If the engine fails to start
within 15 seconds, turn the key to the “OFF” position,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the normal starting
procedure.
Extremely Cold Weather (below ⫺29°C or ⫺20°F) To
insure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your dealer) is recommended.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and
once the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly. See section 6 of
this manual for the proper jump starting procedures and follow them carefully.
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
249
If Engine Fails to Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“NORMAL STARTING” procedure, it may be flooded.
Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it there while cranking the engine. This should clear
any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking up to 15
seconds with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to
5
250
STARTING AND OPERATING
the floor. Release the accelerator pedal and the key once
the engine is running smoothly. Do not overspeed engine.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, the “NORMAL STARTING” procedure
should be repeated.
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms engine coolant and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord
to a standard 110-115 volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
Module.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 volt electrical cord could
cause electrocution.
STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the
engine is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
251
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or
“N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Brake/Transmission Interlock System
This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out
of PARK and into any gear unless the brake pedal is
pressed. This system is active only while the ignition
switch is in the ACCESSORY or ON position. Always
depress the brake pedal first, before moving the gear
selector out of PARK.
5
252
STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of
PARK unless the key is in the ACCESSORY or ON
position.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.
Four Speed Automatic Transmission
The electronically controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle, may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles.
Reset Mode - Electronic Transmission
The transmission is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could cause
damage, the transmission automatically shifts into second gear. The transmission remains in second gear
despite the forward gear selected. Park (P), Reverse (R),
and Neutral (N) will continue to operate. This Reset
feature allows the vehicle to be driven to a dealer for
service without damaging the transmission.
In the event that the problem has been momentary, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears.
• Stop the vehicle and shift into Park (P).
• Turn the key to OFF then restart the engine.
• Shift into the desired range and resume driving.
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, it is
recommended that you visit a dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, dealer service is
required.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL positions into another gear range.
“P” Park
Supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never
attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion.
Apply parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range.
“R” Reverse
Shift into this range only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
253
“N” Neutral
Engine may be started in this range.
“D” Overdrive
To be used for most city and highway driving, it provides
smoothest upshifts and downshifts and best fuel
economy. When frequent transmission shifting occurs
while using the “D” Overdrive position, such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions,
(i.e. in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds or
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick mode and
select the “3” range.
NOTE: Using the “3” range in the AutoStick mode
while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up.
5
254
STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOSTICK
Autostick is a driver-interactive transmission that offers
manual gear shifting capability to provide you with more
control. Autostick allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and
improve overall vehicle performance. This system can
also provide you with more control during passing, city
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
Autostick Operation
The Autostick position is just below the Overdrive position and is identified by the word “AUTOSTICK”. When
you place the shift lever in the Autostick position, it can
be moved from side to side. Moving the lever to the left
(-) triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an upshift.
The gear position will be shown in the transmission gear
display, located in the instrument cluster.
You can shift in or out of the autostick mode at any time
without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal. If you
choose the Overdrive mode, the transmission will operate automatically; shifting between the four available
gears. When you wish to engage autostick, simply move
the shift lever to the AUTOSTICK position. The transmission will remain in the current gear until an upshift or
downshift is chosen.
Move the lever back to the Overdrive position to shift out
of the Autostick mode.
Autostick General Information
• The transmission will automatically upshift from first
to second gear and from second to third gear when
engine speed reaches about 6300 RPM.
• Downshifts from third to second gear above 74 mph
(119 km/h) and from second to first gear above 41
mph (66 km/h) will be ignored.
STARTING AND OPERATING
• You can start out in first, second, or third gear. Shifting
into fourth gear can occur only after vehicle speed
reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop.
• Starting out in third gear is helpful in snowy or icy
conditions.
• While in the Autostick mode, Speed Control will only
function in third or fourth gear.
Downshifting out of third gear will turn off the speed
control.
• If the system detects powertrain overheating, the
transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode
and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
255
• If the system detects a problem it will disable the
Autostick mode and the transmission will return to the
automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE — IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides full time, on-demand, All Wheel
Drive (AWD). The system is automatic with no driver
inputs or additional driving skills required. Under normal driving conditions, the front wheels provide most of
the traction. If the front wheels begin to lose traction,
power is shifted automatically to the rear wheels. The
greater the front wheel traction loss, the greater the
power transfer to the rear wheels.
5
256
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
size may cause failure of the power transfer unit
and/or the viscous coupling.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the
Park position. To release the parking brake, pull out on
the parking brake release located on the left side of the
instrument panel.
PARKING BRAKE
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch on, the brake light in the instrument cluster will
turn on.
NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Parking Brake Release
STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the gear selector in Park, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the selector out of park. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb
on a downhill grade and away from the curb on a uphill
grade.
The parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
257
WARNING!
• Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be injured. Children should be warned not
to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector lever. Don’t leave the keys in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving: failure to do so can lead to brake
failure, and an accident.
5
258
STARTING AND OPERATING
BRAKE SYSTEM
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine
off), the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems lose normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. There will be some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident
by increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the Brake Warning Lamp.
Anti-Lock Brake System
The Anti-Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle
stability and brake performance under most braking
conditions. The system automatically “pumps” the
brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
wheel lock-up.
WARNING!
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
259
The ABS light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake
System. The light will come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not come on when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
bulb repaired as soon as possible.
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light
remain on, the Anti-Lock brakes (ABS) and Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
5
260
STARTING AND OPERATING
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system performing its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system
is working properly. This self check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
• and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the
end of the stop.
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated
electronic equipment that may be susceptible to
interference caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking
capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into Anti-lock:
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
• the clicking sound of solenoid valves,
• brake pedal pulsations,
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
STARTING AND OPERATING
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason, the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and does not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
261
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolong operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
5
262
STARTING AND OPERATING
TRACTION CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The Traction Control System reduces wheel slip and
maintains traction at the driving (front) wheels. The
system reduces wheel slip by engaging the brake on the
wheel that is losing traction (spinning). The system will
operate at speeds below 35 mph (56 km/h).
The system is always in the “stand by” mode unless,
• The Traction Control Switch has been used to turn the
system OFF
Traction Control Switch
• There is a Traction Control System malfunction
• The system has been deactivated to prevent damage to
the brake system due to overheated brake temperatures
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• The Traction Control system will make buzzing or
clicking sounds when in operation.
263
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
• Extended heavy use of Traction Control may cause the
system to deactivate and turn on the traction control
indicator located in the instrument cluster.
This is to prevent overheating of the brake system and
is a normal condition. The system will remain disabled
for about 4 minutes until the brakes have cooled. The
system will automatically reactivate and turn off the
traction control indicator.
• If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, ice, or snow,
turn the Traction Control System OFF before attempting to “rock” the vehicle free.
5
NOTE:
• P(Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
264
STARTING AND OPERATING
• European Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H
• Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• LT(Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
STARTING AND OPERATING
265
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary Spare tire
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)
215 = Section Width in Milimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)
R = Construction Code
—⬙R⬙ means Radial Construction.
—⬙D⬙ means Diagonal or Bias Construction.
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)
5
266
STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.
H = Speed Symbol
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load
index under certain operating conditions.
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved under specified
operating conditions. (ie. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions and posted speed limits).
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire
Light Load = Light Load Tire
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.
Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire
however the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including
date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
267
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side
of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use.
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location.(2 digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size.(2 digits)
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer.(1 to 4 digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured.(2 digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured.(2 digits)
—01 means the year 2001.
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.
5
268
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure for passenger cars is listed on either the face of the driver’s door
or the driver’s side “B” pillar. For vehicles other than
passenger cars, the cold tire inflation pressures are listed
on either the “B” pillar, the Certification Label or in the
Tire Inflation Pressures brochure in the glove compartment.
Tire Placard Location
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire and Loading Information Placard
269
4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear
and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and the Vehicle Loading section of
this manual.
Tire and Loading Information
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWR’s, vehicle loading and trailer towing, see the
Vehicle Loading section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
5
270
STARTING AND OPERATING
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in step 4.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on
your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (since 5 x 150 = 750,
and 1400 – 750 = 650 lb.)
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and
number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the
seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: For the following example the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392
Kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING
271
5
272
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES—GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
1. Safety—
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause
accidents.
• Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in
tire failure.
• Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause
damage that results in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to
the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or
left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Economy—
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Underinflation also increases tire
rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.
273
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure conditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
5
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure for passenger cars
is listed on either the face of the driver’s door or the
driver’s side “B” pillar. For vehicles other than passenger
cars, the cold tire inflation pressures are listed on either
the “B” pillar, the Certification Label or in the Tire
Inflation Pressures brochure in the glove compartment.
Tire Placard Location
274
STARTING AND OPERATING
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are underinflated.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap–if equipped. This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1mile
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side wall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the
outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this
outside temperature condition.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
275
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
5
276
STARTING AND OPERATING
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use
only. With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited
tread life. When two or more tread wear indicators
appear in adjacent grooves, the temporary use spare
tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the
warnings which apply to your spare. Failure to do so
could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle
control.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
277
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited use
spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare
tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on vehicle
at the first opportunity.
5
278
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING!
The limited use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold
tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire
placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly.
Replace (or repair) the original tire at the first
opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure
to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck. And
don’t let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).
See the paragraph on Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section
6 of this manual.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves and will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the indicators appear
in 2 or more adjacent grooves, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
279
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (see the paragraph on tread
wear indicators). Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire. The
service description and load identification will be found
on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you
contact your original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability.
5
280
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have an accident
resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire
and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your
vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have an accident.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
Alignment And Balance
Poor suspension alignment may result in:
• Fast tire wear.
• Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
wear.
• Vehicle pull to right or left.
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer
for proper diagnosis.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-ofbalance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
All Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles must have the same
size and type tires on all wheel positions. Unequal
tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire size may
cause failure of the power transfer unit and/or the
viscous coupling.
281
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPM) system uses
wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic
sensors to monitor tire pressure levels (EXCLUDING
THE SPARE TIRE). Sensors, mounted to each wheel as
part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) display
in the instrument cluster.
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and too maintain the proper pressure.
When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following
messages.
5
282
STARTING AND OPERATING
1,2,3, OR 4 TIRE(S) LOW PRESSURE
Low tire pressure levels of 26 psi [1.79 bars] (179 kPa) or
less detected in one or more tires.
Inspect all tires for proper inflation pressure, once the
proper tire pressure has been set, the TPM system
warning will reset automatically when the vehicle has
been driven for at least 2 minutes at or above 20 mph (32
km/h).
1,2,3, OR 4 TIRE(S) HIGH PRESSURE
High tire pressure levels of 45 psi [3.10 bars] (310 kPa) or
more detected in one or more tires.
Inspect all tires for proper inflation pressure, once the
proper tire pressure has been set, the TPM system
warning will reset automatically when the vehicle has
been driven for at least 2 minutes at or above 20 mph (32
km/h).
SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM/SEE
OWNER’S MANUAL
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPM) system requires
service.
See your authorized dealer for service.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
The TPM system has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPM system pressures
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or
style. After-market wheels can cause sensor damage.
Do not use tire sealant or balance beads if your
vehicle is equipped with a TPM system, as damage
to the sensors may result.
NOTE:
• The TPM system can inform the driver of a low tire
pressure condition of 26 psi [1.79 bars] (179 kPa) or
less, or high a tire pressure condition of 45 psi [3.10
bars] (310 kPa) or more.
283
• The TPM system is not intended to replace normal tire
care and maintenance, nor to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPM system should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap, if equipped. This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the wheel rim
sensor.
5
284
STARTING AND OPERATING
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123
TIRE CHAINS
Use only compact chains, or other traction aids that meet
SAE type “Class S” specifications. Chains must be the
proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain
manufacturer.
NOTE: Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following
precautions:
• Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and
other suspension components, it is important that only
chains in good condition are used. Broken chains can cause
serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate chain breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the chain before further use.
• Install chains on the front wheels as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about 1⁄2 mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 45 mph (70 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps,
especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not use on rear wheels of All Wheel Drive (AWD)
vehicles.
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions on the
method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for
use. Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the
chain manufacturer if different than the speed recommended by the manufacture.
285
NOTE: In order to avoid damage to tires, chains, and
your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period of time
on dry pavement. Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s
instructions on method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for usage.
Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both
the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacture suggest
a maximum speed. This notice applies to all chain
traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains.
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during winter. Standard tires are of the all season type
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire side wall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of 4, failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
5
286
STARTING AND OPERATING
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120
km/h).
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates, and tend to develop irregular wear patterns.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”
Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
shown in the following diagram.
STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Your vehicle is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline having
an octane range of 87 to 89 or higher. The
manufacturer recommends the use of 89
octane for optimum performance.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
287
Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world
have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define
fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions,
engine performance, and durability for your vehicle. The
manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet
the WWFC specifications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
5
288
STARTING AND OPERATING
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol. Use of
these blends may result in starting and driveability
problems and may damage critical fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline
blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer.
While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it
does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase the octane number. Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance
advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number
without MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT have shown
to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends using gasolines without MMT. Since the MMT
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump,
you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not
his/her gasoline contains MMT.
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
higher than those allowed in the United States.
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasolines.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Materials Added to Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives are not needed under
normal conditions and would result in additional cost.
Therefore you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance,
damage the emission control system.
289
• An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as
octane enhancers is not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
5
290
STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
• Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,
be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap
could let impurities into the fuel system.
291
Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster
will turn on. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened
each time the vehicle is refueled.
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
NOTE:
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is properly
tightened. If the gas cap is not secured properly the
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
5
292
STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown in the
charts that follow. This information should be used for
passenger and luggage loading as indicated.
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
If the seatbacks are folded for carrying cargo, do not
exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR.
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a certification label attached to the rear
of the driver’s door.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Type of Vehicle
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Because the front wheels drive and steer the vehicle,
it is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front
and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to insure that it
is not over the GVWR.
293
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle by axle and side by side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
5
294
STARTING AND OPERATING
A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration. Note that
neither the GVWR or the GAWR capacities have been
exceeded.
Example Only
Front
Rear Axle
Axle
Empty Weight
2538 lbs
2076 lbs
(1151 kg) (942 kg )
Load (Including driver, pass223 lbs
890 lbs
sengers and cargo)
(101 kg)
(404 kg)
Total 2762 lbs
2968 lbs
(1253 kg) (1346 kg)
GAWR
2826 lbs
3035 lbs
(1282 kg) (1377 kg)
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.
STARTING AND OPERATING
295
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Towing Requirements
Perform maintenance services as prescribed in the maintenance schedules manual. When your vehicle is used for
trailer towing, never exceed the gross axle weight rating
(GAWR) by the addition of:
• The trailer tongue load must be considered as part of
the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to the Tire–
Safety Information Section in this manual.
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• Remember that everything put in or on the trailer adds
to the load on your vehicle.
Tongue weight must be equal to at least 10% of Gross
Trailer Weight (GTW), but no more than 15% of GTW.
• The maximum frontal area of the trailer cannot exceed
40 square feet (3.72 square meters).
• The “D” range can be selected when towing. However,
if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the “3”
range must be selected.
NOTE: Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up.
5
296
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are
recommended for motoring safety.
• The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more
than 45 minutes of continuous operation. See Schedule
“B” in section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid
change intervals.
NOTE:
• Check the automatic transmission fluid level before
towing. Fluid discoloration, or a burnt odor, shows the
need for a transmission fluid and filter change.
• For vehicles equipped with Autostick. By using the
Autostick modes, and selecting a specific gear range,
frequent shifting can be avoided. The highest gear
range should be selected that allows for adequate
performance. For example, choose “4” if the desired
speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or “2” if needed
to maintain the desired speed.
• Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to
prevent excess heat generation. A reduction in vehicle
speed may be required to avoid extended driving at
high RPM. Return to a higher gear range or vehicle
speed when road conditions and RPM level allows.
STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAVEL CONDITION
UP TO 2 PERSONS &
LUGGAGE
3 TO 4 PERSONS &
LUGGAGE
5 TO 6 PERSONS &
LUGGAGE
MAXIMUM TRAILER
WEIGHT
Trailer Frontal Area Not
To Exceed 40 Square
Feet (3.72 Square Meters)
3.5/3.8L ENGINES
MAX. COMBINED
WEIGHT OF VEHICLE
AND TRAILER NOT TO
EXCEED 8,600 lbs (3900
kg)
3,500 lbs (1600 kg)
3,000 lbs (1360 kg)
1,000 lbs (454 kg)
297
A load equalizing hitch is recommended for loaded
trailer weights above 1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for
weights above 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
5
298
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Connecting trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic
brake lines can overload your brake system and
cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you
need them and could have an accident.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
VEHICLE (Flat towing with all four wheels on the
ground)
Recreational towing for this vehicle is not recommended.
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four
wheels are off the ground.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
▫ With Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
Ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
䡵 Jump-Starting Procedures If Battery Is Low . . . . 309
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
With A Tow Dolley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
6
300
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The hazard flasher switch is located in the center of the
instrument panel above the center air outlets.
To engage the Hazard Warning Flashers, depress the
switch on the instrument panel. When the Hazard Warning Switch is activated, all directional turn signals will
flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the
flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition switch is OFF.
Hazard Flasher Switch
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers may wear down your battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — Slow down.
• In city traffic — While stopped, put transmission in
neutral, but do not increase engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to floor, and
the fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
301
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for
service.
6
302
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see Section 7, Maintenance, of this
manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never get any part of your
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
• The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jack Location
Five Passenger Seating
The jack and jack-handle are stowed in the rear storage
bin located behind the second row bench seat. Pull up on
the storage bin cover to access the jack and jack tools.
303
Remove the scissors jack and jack handle by rotating the
small wing nut to the left.
6
Jack Wing Nut
Jack Location
304
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Six Passenger Seating
The jack and jack-handle are stowed in the rear storage
bin located in the rear cargo floor. Pull up on the storage
bin cover and liner to access the jack and jack tools.
Spare Tire Stowage
Five Passenger Seating
The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by
means of a cable winch mechanism. To remove or stow
the spare, use the jack handle to rotate the “spare tire
drive” nut. The nut is located under the plastic cover at
the center rear of the cargo floor area, just inside the
liftgate opening.
Six Passenger Seating
The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by
means of a cable winch mechanism. To remove or stow
the spare, use the jack handle to rotate the “spare tire
drive” nut. The nut is located under the trim cover at the
center of the rear storage bin in the rear cargo floor.
Jack Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
305
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack handle only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
When the spare is clear, tilt the retainer at the end of the
cable and pull it through the center of the wheel.
Lowering Spare Tire
Spare Tire Removal
Fit the jack-handle over the drive nut. Rotate the nut to
the left until the spare is on the ground with enough slack
cable to allow you to pull the tire out from under the
vehicle.
Preparations For Jacking
Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoid ice or
slippery areas, set the parking brake and place the gear
selector in PARK. Turn OFF the ignition.
6
306
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
• Block both the front and rear
of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right
front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
• Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
1. Remove the spare wheel, scissors jack and jack-handle
from stowage.
2. Carefully pry off the wheel center cap if equipped,
using the tip of the jack handle.
3. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still
on the ground.
4. There are two jack engagement locations on each side
of the body — refer to the following illustration.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
307
location. Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the
jack is securely engaged. Never jack up the vehicle
using any suspension components.
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
Jack Engagement Locations
5. These locations are on the sill flange on the underside
of the body. The jack is to be located, engaging the
flanges, 20 cm (8 inches) inward from the edge of the
wheel opening closest to the wheel to be changed. Place
the wrench on the jack screw and turn to the right until
the jack head is properly engaged in the described
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6
308
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
7. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with wheel
covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do not
pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub.
8. Install the spare wheel, for vehicles with wheel covers,
align the notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on
the wheel. Install the cover on the wheel by hand only
and install the wheel lug nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not
tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered.
NOTE: Do not install the wheel cover on the compact
spare.
Do not use a hammer or force to install the wheel covers.
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. Correct
wheel nut tightness is 130 N·m (95 ft. lbs). If in doubt
about the correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your dealer or at a service station.
11. Lower the jack to its fully closed position.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack, thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
12. Secure the flat or spare tire as follows:
• If your vehicle is equipped with cast aluminum
wheels, the center cap of the wheel must be removed prior to flat tire stowage. Store the center cap
inside the glove box or other storage compartment.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• Turn the wheel so that the valve-stem is down. Slide
the wheel retainer through the center of the wheel
and position it properly across the wheel opening.
• For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation,
stow with the valve-stem toward the rear of the
vehicle.
• Using the jack-handle, rotate the drive nut to the
right until the wheel is drawn into place against the
underside of the vehicle.
• Continue to rotate the nut until you hear the mechanism click three times. It cannot be overtightened.
Push against the tire several times to be sure it is
securely in place.
13. Stow the jack and jack handle.
14. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct
pressure as required.
309
NOTE: When reinstalling the wheel center cap, insure
that the valve stem symbol on the back of the cap is
pointed toward the wheel valve stem. Install the center
cap using hand pressure only. Do not use a hammer.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES IF BATTERY IS
LOW
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is on. You can be hurt by the fan.
6
310
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could
enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. If
the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may
be used to obtain a start from another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow
this procedure carefully.
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not allow
battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean
over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps
to touch each other. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin,
flush contaminated area immediately with large quantities of water.
• A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable
and explosive. Keep flame or spark away from the vent
holes. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster
source with an output that exceeds 12 volts.
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact.
2. When boost is provided by a battery in another
vehicle, park that vehicle within booster cable reach and
without letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake,
place the automatic transmission in PARK and turn the
ignition switch to the OFF position for both vehicles.
3. Turn off the heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
terminal of the discharged battery. Connect the other end
of the same cable to the positive terminal of the booster
battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the engine of the
vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you have
a good contact on the engine.
6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
there is a difference in the surface traction under the front
(driving) wheels.
311
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of
the front wheels. You could lose control of the
vehicle and possibly have an accident. Accelerate
slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be
poor traction (ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
6
312
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between Reverse
and Drive. Usually the least accelerator pedal pressure to
maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels is most effective.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck. And
don’t let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 35 mph (55 km/h).
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
With Ignition Key
Front Wheel Drive
Your vehicle may be towed under the following conditions: The gear selector must be in NEUTRAL, the
distance to be traveled must not exceed 100 miles (160
km), the towing speed must not exceed 44 mph (72
km/h), and both front and rear wheels must be on the
ground. Exceeding these towing limits may cause a
transmission geartrain failure. If the transmission is not
operative, or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 100
miles (160 km), the vehicle must be towed with the front
wheels off the ground.
313
All Wheel Drive
Your vehicle may be towed under the following conditions: The gear selector must be in NEUTRAL, the
distance to be traveled must not exceed 100 miles (160
km), the towing speed must not exceed 44 mph (72
km/h), and both front and rear wheels must be on the
ground. If your vehicle must be towed farther or at a
higher rate of speed, it must be transported on a flat bed
truck.
6
314
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
All Transmissions
CAUTION!
• Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front
with sling type towing equipment. Damage to the
front fascia will result.
• Always use wheel lift equipment when towing
from the front. The only other approved method
of towing is with a flat bed truck.
• Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to
the rear sheet metal, liftgate and fascia will occur.
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result.
If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed
(wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ON
position, not the ACCESSORY position. Make certain the
transmission remains in NEUTRAL.
Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. The only approved method of towing with out the ignition key is
with a flat bed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
VEHICLE (Flat towing with all four wheels on the
ground)
Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission, is only permitted within the limitations
described in this section.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
315
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
VEHICLE WITH A TOW DOLLEY
The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow an
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) or front wheel drive vehicle on a
tow dolley. Vehicle damage may occur.
6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 3.5L Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
䡵 3.8L Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . . . 322
▫ Drive Belts — Check Condition And Tension . . 330
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
▫ Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
▫ Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
▫ Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
7
318
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
▫ Power Steering — Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
▫ Front & Rear Suspension Ball Joints . . . . . . . . 337
▫ Steering Shaft Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
▫ Steering Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
▫ Drive Shaft Universal Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
▫ Windshield And Rear Window Washers . . . . . 339
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
▫ Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . 345
▫ Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
▫ Master Cylinder — ABS Brakes Brake Fluid
Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
▫ Fuel System Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
▫ All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped . . . . . 352
▫ Front And Rear Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . 354
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
▫ Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders . . . 358
䡵 Integrated Power Module (IPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
䡵 Replacement Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
▫ Standard Quad Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ High Intensity Discharge Headlights (HID) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
▫ Front Park/Turn Signal And Sidemarker
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
▫ Front Fog Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker And
Back-Up Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
319
▫ License Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
䡵 Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
䡵 Recommended Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
7
320
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3.5L ENGINES
Engine Compartment 3.5L Engines
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
321
3.8L ENGINES
7
Engine Compartment 3.8L Engines
322
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indicator Light” on could cause further damage to the
emission control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must be
serviced before any emissions tests can be performed.
• If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing
while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged. A loose fuel filler cap message will
be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas
cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication
that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the odometer
reset button to turn the message off. If the problem
persists, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If
the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving
the problem will turn the MIL light off.
323
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states which have an I/M (Inspection and
Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the
following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)
is functioning and is not on when the engine is running,
and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready
for testing.
Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery
replacement. If the OBD system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
7
324
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD system is ready, you must do
the following:
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal
bulb check.
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn off the
ignition key or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD system is not ready and you should not
proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start
the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation, you should have your
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M
station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on
with the engine running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopar威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to insure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-Mopar威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
325
DEALER SERVICE
Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special
tools and equipment to perform all service operations in
an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your vehicle.
Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure
yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
7
326
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before
starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
327
Change Engine Oil
Road conditions and your kind of driving affects the
interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the
following list to see if any apply to you.
• Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
• Stop and Go driving.
• Extensive engine idling.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
Engine Oil Dipstick
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
• Trailer towing.
• Taxi, Police or delivery service (commercial service).
• Off-Road or desert operation.
7
328
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
If none of these apply to you, then change your engine oil
at every interval shown on schedule ⬙A⬙ of the ⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet
the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard
MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.5 Liter
Engines
The proper SAE viscosity grade of engine oil should be
selected based on the following recommendation and be
within the operating temperature shown in the engine oil
viscosity chart.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
329
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.8 Liter
Engines
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. Refer to your engine
oil filler cap for the recommended engine oil viscosity for
your vehicle.
For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to
the Engine Compartment illustration in this section.
• SAE 10W-30 engine oil is preferred. SAE 5W-30 engine
oil is allowed during cold weather only to improve
cold weather starting.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
7
330
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Synthetic Engine Oils
There are a number of engine oils being promoted as
either synthetic or semi-synthetic. If you chose to use
such a product, use only those oils that are American
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified and have the recommended SAE viscosity grade. Follow the maintenance
schedule that describes your driving type.
Materials Added to Engine Oil
The manufacture strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
it’s performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your dealer, service station, or
governmental agency for advice on how and where used
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacture’s engines have a full-flow type oil filter.
Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of
replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to assure most efficient service.
Mopar Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil filter and
are recommended.
Drive Belts — Check Condition and Tension
At the mileage indicated in the maintenance schedule, all
belts should be checked for condition and proper tension.
Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Belts should be inspected for evidence of cuts, cracks, or
glazing, and replaced if there is indication of damage
which could result in belt failure. Low generator belt
tension can cause battery failure.
Also check belt routing to make sure there is no interference between the belts and other engine components.
Spark Plugs
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine performance and emission control. New plugs should be installed at the specified mileage. The entire set should be
replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark
plug. Malfunctioning spark plugs can damage the catalytic converter. For proper type of replacement spark
plugs, refer to the “Vehicle Emission Control Information” label in the engine compartment.
331
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Under normal driving conditions, replace the air filter at
the intervals shown on Schedule “A”. If, however, you
drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe conditions, the filter element should be inspected periodically and replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on
Schedule “B”.
WARNING!
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
7
332
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fuel Filter
A plugged fuel filter can cause stalling, limit the speed at
which a vehicle can be driven or cause hard starting.
Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the
fuel tank, filter replacement may be necessary. See your
local dealer for service.
Catalytic Converter
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emission control device.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in
areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the
vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the
vehicle allowed to cool. Thereafter, service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
333
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Maintenance-Free Battery
The top of the MAINTENANCE-FREE battery is permanently sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is
periodic maintenance required.
7
334
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 volts. Don’t allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while battery is in
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a system
performance check. Drive belt tension should also be
checked at this time.
335
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer
to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for
further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
7
336
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compressor Oil, or Refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
The filter access door is located under the instrument
panel on the passenger side. To replace the filter slide the
lock toward the rear of the vehicle (unlock position).
Remove the access door and pull the filter downward.
When installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation. Align the black arrow on the bottom of the filter
frame with the direction of airflow (away from the
blower motor and towards the center of the car).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedules” section of this
manual for the recommended air conditioning filter
replacement intervals.
Power Steering — Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified
DaimlerChrysler Dealership.⬙
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and
Genuine Parts for correct fluid type.
Front & Rear Suspension Ball Joints
The suspension ball joints are permanently sealed. No
regular maintenance is required for these components.
337
Steering Shaft Seal
The steering shaft seal, at the point where the shaft passes
through the bulkhead, is lubricated when it is installed. If
the seal becomes noisy when the steering shaft is turned,
it should be lubricated with a multi-purpose grease.
Mopar multi-purpose lubricant is recommended.
Steering Linkage
The tie rod end ball joints are permanently lubricated and
do not require periodic maintenance.
Drive Shaft Universal Joints
Your vehicle has constant velocity universal joints. Periodic lubrication of these joints is not required. However,
the joint boots should be inspected for external leakage or
damage when other maintenance is performed. If leakage
or damage is evident, the universal joint boot and grease
should be replaced immediately.
7
338
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Continued operation could result in failure of the universal joint due to water and dirt contamination of the
grease. This would require complete replacement of the
joint assembly.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar威 Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, doors, liftgate and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching components to insure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
Windshield Wiper Blades
The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield
should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
339
Windshield and Rear Window Washers
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. It is located in the engine
compartment and should be checked for fluid level at
regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the
system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid
when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates.
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
7
340
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, follow the preceding safety tips.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, don’t open
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator is hot.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh
coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing
properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to
341
drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush and Refill
At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules,
the system should be drained, flushed and refilled.
If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount
of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old
antifreeze solution.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant, refer
to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
for correct coolant type.
7
342
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT engine coolants, may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, it should be replaced with the specified
coolant as soon as possible.
Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propylene
Glycol based coolants is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This
coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100,000 miles before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same
coolant throughout the life of your vehicle. Please review
these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) coolant.
When adding coolant, a minimum solution of 50% recommended Mopar Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/100,000
Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology), or equivalent, in water should be used. Use higher
concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
⫺34°F (⫺37°C ) are anticipated.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of
corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the
engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant
changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the
radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
343
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add coolant when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
7
344
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children
do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open
containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physician
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only
be checked once a month.
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
Points To Remember
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine off and cold, the coolant level in the coolant
recovery bottle should be between the ranges indicated
on the bottle.
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a
few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to
enter the radiator.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
• Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be
added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
• If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when
the engine cools, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
• Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine
coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine which contains
aluminum components.
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
345
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
• Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber.
Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high
heat sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose
routing to be sure hoses do not come in contact with any
heat source or moving component which may cause heat
damage or mechanical wear.
7
346
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
WARNING!
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
present.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Components should be replaced immediately if there is
any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure.
Brakes
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Suggested service intervals can be found in the Maintenance Schedules.
Brake And Power Steering Hoses
When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance,
inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of
heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, abrasion, and excessive swelling
indicate deterioration of the rubber. Particular attention
should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest
to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
present.
NOTE: Often, fluid such as oil, power steering fluid,
and brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations to facilitate the assembly of hoses to couplings.
Therefore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not
necessarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of
hot fluid when systems are under pressure (during
vehicle operation), should be noted before a hose is
replaced based on leakage.
NOTE: Inspection of brake hoses should be performed
whenever the brake system is serviced and at every
engine oil change. Inspect hydraulic brake hoses for
surface cracking, scuffing, or worn spots. If there is any
evidence of cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, the hose
347
should be replaced immediately! Eventual deterioration
of the hose can take place resulting in a possibility of a
burst failure.
WARNING!
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.
You could have an accident. If you see any signs of
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake
hoses replaced immediately.
Master Cylinder — ABS Brakes Brake Fluid Level
Check
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing underhood services, or immediately if
the brake system warning light indicates system failure.
7
348
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid, refer
to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid type.
WARNING!
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
• Use of brake fluid that may have a lower initial
boiling point or unidentified as to specification,
may result in sudden brake failure during hard
prolonged braking. You could have an accident.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid, all brake seal components could be
damaged causing partial or complete brake failure.
Fuel System Hoses
Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel systems are
designed with hoses and quick connect fittings which
have unique material characteristics to provide adequate
sealing and resist attack by deteriorated gasoline.
You are urged to use only the manufacture specified
hoses with quick connect fittings, or their equivalent in
material and specification, in any fuel system servicing. It
is mandatory to replace any damaged hoses or quick
connect fittings that have been removed during service.
349
Care should be taken in installing quick connect fittings
to insure they are properly installed and fully connected.
See your authorized dealer for service.
Automatic Transmission
The automatic transmission and differential assembly are
contained within a single housing.
All automatic transmissions are equipped with a conventional filler tube and dipstick. If fluid is added, it should
be added through the dipstick hole in the case.
The dipstick is located just behind the radiator, lower
right side.
Selection of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission performance. Use only manufacturers recommended transmission fluid, refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and
7
350
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Genuine Parts for correct fluid type. It is important that
the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed
level using the recommended fluid.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturers recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturers recommended fluid will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid type.
Procedure For Checking Fluid Level
The fluid level in the automatic transmission should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with
an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the
transmission and of the fluid.
To properly check the automatic transmission fluid level,
the following procedure must be used:
1. The vehicle must be on level ground.
2. The engine should be running at curb idle speed for a
minimum of 60 seconds.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Fully apply parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear
position ending with the lever in P (PARK). Wipe the area
around the dipstick clean to eliminate the possibility of
dirt entering the transmission.
5. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot
or warm. Hot fluid is approximately 180°F (82°C), which
is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle has
been driven at least 15 miles (24 km). The fluid cannot be
comfortably held between the finger tips. Cold is when
the fluid is below 80°F (27°C).
6. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated.
Remove dipstick and note reading.
a. If the fluid is hot, the reading should be in the
crosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the upper
two holes in the dipstick).
351
b. If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between
the lower two holes in the area marked “COLD”.
If the fluid level indicates low, add sufficient fluid to
bring to the proper level.
CAUTION!
Do not overfill. Dirt and water in the transmission
can cause serious damage. To prevent dirt and water
from entering the transmission after checking or
replenishing fluid, make certain that the dipstick cap
is reseated properly.
Fluid and Filter Changes
Automatic transmission fluid should be changed on all
transmissions as follows:
Normal Usage — No change necessary
7
352
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Severe Usage (fluid and filter) — Refer to Maintenance
Schedule “B”
Severe Usage is defined as:
• Police, taxi, limousine, commercial type operation, or
trailer towing where the vehicle driven regularly for
more than 45 minutes of continuous operation.
NOTE: Refer to Section 8 of this manual for Maintenance Schedules.
If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the
fluid and filter should be changed.
Special Additives
Do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The
only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to
aid in detecting fluid leaks. The use of transmission
sealers should be avoided as they may adversely affect
seals.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped
Under normal operating conditions, periodic fluid level
checks and lubricant changes for the Power Transfer
Unit, Overrunning Clutch and Rear Carrier, are not
required. However when the vehicle is serviced for other
reasons, the exterior surface of these components should
be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks. Confirmed leaks
should be repaired as soon as possible.
Power Transfer Unit
The fill plug is located on the side of the power transfer
unit housing. The fluid should be maintained at a level
even with the bottom of the fill plug hole when the
vehicle is parked on a level surface. If it becomes necessary to add or replace the fluid, use only the manufacturers recommended fluid, refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Overrunning Clutch
The fill plug is located on the side of the overrunning
clutch housing. The fluid should be maintained at a level
even with the bottom of the fill plug hole when the
vehicle is parked on a level surface. If it becomes necessary to add or replace the fluid, use only the manufacturers recommended transmission fluid, refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
fluid type. To assure performance, it is important that the
proper lubricant be used.
Fluid Changes
The fluid should be changed as follows:
Normal Usage
No Service Required
Severe Usage
Power Transfer Unit
Refer to Maintenance
Schedule “B”
Overrunning Clutch
Refer to Maintenance
Schedule “B”
Rear Carrier
Refer to Maintenance
Schedule “B”
Rear Carrier
The fill plug is located on the side of the rear carrier
housing. The fluid should be maintained at a level even
with the bottom of the fill plug hole when the vehicle is
parked on a level surface. if it becomes necessary to add
or replace the fluid, use only the manufacturers recommended fluid, refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants
and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type.
Severe Usage is defined as:
353
1. More than 50% of vehicle operation in stop and go
traffic where vehicle is driven regularly for more than 45
minutes of continuous operation, such as in heavy city or
in construction zone traffic,
2. Police, taxi, limousine, commercial type operation, or
trailer towing where the vehicle driven regularly for
more than 45 minutes of continuous operation.
7
354
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Refer to Section 8 of this manual for Maintenance Schedules.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
Front And Rear Wheel Bearings
Front and rear wheel bearings are permanently sealed.
No regular maintenance is required for these components.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
The most common causes are:
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using a mild car wash soap, and
rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, wash it as soon as possible.
• Use Mopar auto polish to remove road film and stains
and to polish your vehicle. Take care never to scratch
the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
355
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and liftgate be kept clear
and open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
7
356
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.
The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly
with mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To
remove heavy soil, select a nonabrasive, non-acidic
cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush or metal polishes. Only Mopar cleaners are
recommended. Do not use oven cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh
brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective finish.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to match the
color of your vehicle.
Interior Care
Use Mopar Fabric Cleaner to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use Mopar Vinyl Cleaner to clean vinyl upholstery and
trim.
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
357
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with any commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric
defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped
with the radio antenna. Do not use scrapers or other
sharp instruments which may scratch the elements.
WARNING!
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
7
358
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders
Removal
Grab the center of the rubber portion of the cupholder
and lift upward.
Cleaning
Soak the rubber cupholder liner in a mixture of medium
hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap.
Let soak for approximately one hour. After one hour pull
the liner from the water and dip it back into the water
about six times. This will loosen any remaining debris.
Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water.
Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer
surfaces with a clean soft cloth.
Installation
Align the liner in the cupholder and press down firmly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (IPM)
Cavity
1
2
3
4
5
6
Integrated Power Module (IPM)
An Integrated Power Module is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains maxi
fuses, mini fuses and relays. A label that identifies each
component is printed on the inside of the cover.
7
8
9
Maxi Fuse
40 Amp
Green
Spare
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
359
Description
Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) Pump
Ignition Off Draw (IOD)
Body Control Module
(BCM) Feed 1
Electronic Back Light (EBL)
Front Wipers
Starter
Power Seat C/B
Power Sunroof
7
360
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
10
11
12
13
14
15
40
41
42
Maxi Fuse
Spare
40 Amp
Green
Spare
40 Amp
Green
Spare
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
Description
Headlight Washer, Power
Liftgate
Cavity
24
25
Radiator Fan 1
Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) Module
Driver Door Node
Passenger Door Node
26
27
28
29
Front Blower
30
31
Mini Fuse
Description
20 Amp Yel- Power Outlet (Selectable)
low
15 Amp Blue Radio, Amplifier, Navigation, Hands-Free Phone
(HFM), Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC),
EC, SNRF, Mirror
20 Amp Yel- Power Outlet
low
Spare
25 Amp
Horn
Natural
20 Amp Yel- Cluster, CHMSL, Stop
low
Lights, Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS)
10 Amp Red Ignition Switch
20 Amp Yel- Hazard
low
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
34
35
36
37
38
39
44
45
46
Mini Fuse
Spare
Spare
20 Amp Yellow
25 Amp
Natural
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
25 Amp
Natural
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Cavity
47
Electronic Automatic
Transaxle (EATX) Solenoid
ASD
48
Fuel Pump
49
A/C Clutch, MTV
50
Rear Heated Seats
Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) Ignition Run
Passenger Door
361
Mini Fuse
Description
20 Amp Yel- Driver Door
low
15 Amp Blue PLG, OHC, Body Control
Module (BCM), Navigation, Hands-Free Phone
(HFM)
25 Amp
Amplifier
Natural
15 Amp Blue HVAC, DVD, RAD, CLK,
SKREEM
7
362
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• When installing the Integrated Power Module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the Integrated Power
Module, and possibly result in a electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage
rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than
indicated may result in a dangerous electrical
system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit
that must be corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
You may:
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS — Interior
Bulb Number
Center & Rear Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Front Door Courtesy Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Liftgate Light(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Overhead Console Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 212–2
Visor Vanity Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V26377
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your dealer for replacement instructions.
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
363
LIGHT BULBS — Exterior
Bulb Number
Back-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
Rear Stop, Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
Rear Sidemarker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Fog Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9145
Front Turn Signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157A
Front Sidemarker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Standard Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H7
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
7
364
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
2. Remove the rubber boot seals.
Standard Quad Headlights
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
1. Remove the two screws securing the headlight module to the vehicle and pull the headlight module forward
away from the vehicle, disengaging the assembly from
the lower attachment clip.
4. Rotate the bulb to the left and replace the bulb.
Reinstall the rubber boot seals and then the headlight
module.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
High Intensity Discharge Headlights (HID) — If
Equipped
The headlights are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlight switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlight bulb
yourself. If a headlight bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
365
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge Headlights (HID), when the headlights are turned
on there is a blue hue to the lights. This diminishes and
becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds, as
the system charges.
WARNING!
A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlights when the
headlight switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.
7
366
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Park/Turn Signal and Sidemarker Lights
1. Remove the two screws securing the headlight module to the vehicle and pull the headlight module forward
away from the vehicle, disengaging the assembly from
the lower attachment clip.
3. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket and then reinstall
the headlight module.
Front Fog Light
1. Reach under the front fascia and grasp the front fog
light bulb.
2. Twist the front fog light bulb to remove from the fog
light module.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
CAUTION!
2. Twist the bulb socket to remove from the headlight
module and pull the bulb from socket.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
367
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker and
Back-up Lights
3. Twist the socket assembly to remove it from the
housing.
1. Raise the liftgate.
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
2. Remove the two tail light assembly screws and rotate
the assembly outward to remove the ball stud form the
attaching grommet.
5. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
tail light assembly.
License Light
1. Place a screwdriver in the slot next to the release tab
and push on the release tab to remove the lens.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Replace the bulb and
push on the lens until it snaps into place.
7
368
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
Fuel (approximate) 89
Octane
Engine Oil-With Filter
3.5 Liter Engines (SAE 10W-30, API Certified)
3.8 Liter Engines (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
U.S.
23 gallons
Metric
87 liters
5.5 qts
5.0 qts
5.2 liters
4.7 liters
10.7 qts
10.1 liters
11.8 qts
11.2 liters
Cooling System *
3.5 Liter Engines (Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/
100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
3.8 Liter Engines (Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/
100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
369
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
3.5 Liter Engine Oil
3.8 Liter Engine Oil
Spark Plugs
Oil Filter, 3.5/3.8 Liter Engines
Fuel Selection
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
Use API Certified SAE 10W-30 engine oil, refer to oil viscosity chart for correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 engine oil. Refer to your oil filler cap for correct SAE grade, meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine compartment.
Mopar威 5281090 or equiv.
89 Octane
7
370
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
AWD Power Transfer Unit
AWD Overrunning Clutch
AWD Rear Carrier
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Mopar威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
Mopar威 Gear Lubricant 75W-90 or equivalent.
Mopar威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
Mopar威 Gear Lubricant 75W-90 or equivalent.
Mopar威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not
available, then DOT 4 or DOT 4+ is acceptable. Use only recommended
brake fluids.
Mopar威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
䡵 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . 372
▫ Schedule “B” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
䡵 Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
▫ Schedule “A” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 C
S
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
372
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold
type must be done at the times or mileages specified to
assure the continued proper functioning of the emission
control system. These, and all other maintenance services
included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent mainS tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
C conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip
H driving.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Inspection and service also should be done any time a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part which has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of California, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
There are two maintenance schedules that show the
required service for your vehicle.
First is Schedule “B”. It is for vehicles that are operated
under the conditions that are listed below and at the
beginning of the schedule.
• Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).
• Stop and go driving.
• Extensive engine idling.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C).
• Trailer towing.〫
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).〫
• Off-road or desert operation.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
NOTE: Most vehicles are operated under the conditions
listed for Schedule ⬙B⬙.
Second is Schedule “A”. It is for vehicles that are not
operated under any of the conditions listed under Schedule ⬙B⬙.
Use the schedule that best describes your driving conditions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the
interval that occurs first.
373 M
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
At Each Stop for Fuel
D
• Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully UL
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while E
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu- S
racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
374
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Once a Month
At Each Oil Change
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
• Check the fluid levels of coolant bottle, brake master
cylinder and transmission, add as needed.
• Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
operation.
• Inspect the exhaust system.
• Inspect the brake hoses.
• Inspect the CV joints and front suspension components.
• Check the automatic transmission fluid level.
• Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
SCHEDULE “B”
SCHEDULE “B”
Follow schedule “B” if you usually operate your vehicle
under one or more of the following conditions. Change
the automatic transmission fluid and filter every 60,000
miles (96 000 km) if the vehicle is usually operated under
one or more of the conditions marked with an 〫.
• Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).
• Stop and go driving.
• Extensive engine idling.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C).
375 M
A
I
N
• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial ser- T
E
vice).〫
N
A
• Off-road or desert operation.
N
C
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your E
• Trailer towing.〫
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the S
C
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
H
E
If none of these apply to you, then change your engine oil D
at every interval shown on schedule ⬙A⬙ of the ⬙Mainte- U
L
nance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
E
S
8
M 376 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
A Rotate Tires
N
C Inspect the brake linings.
E Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
necessary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. *
Change the All Wheel Drive (AWD) power
transfer unit fluid. (See note at the end of this
chart)
Replace the air conditioning filter.
3, 000
(5 000 )
X
6, 000
(10 000 )
X
X
X
X
9, 000
(14 000)
X
X
X
12, 000
(19 000)
X
X
15, 000
(24 000)
X
X
X
X
X
18, 000
(29 000)
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate Tires
Inspect the brake linings.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. (Front &
Rear)
Inspect the PCV valve and replace as necessary.*
Change the All Wheel Drive (AWD) power transfer
unit fluid. (See note at the end of this chart)
Change the All Wheel Drive (AWD) overrunning
clutch and rear carrier fluid. (See the note at the
end of this chart)
Replace the air conditioning filter.
21, 000
(34 000)
X
24, 000
(38 000)
X
X
X
X
27, 000
(43 000)
X
30, 000
(48 000)
X
X
X
X
33, 000
(53 000)
X
X
377 M
36, 000
(58 000)
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
X
X
X
X
8
X
X
X
M 378 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
A Rotate Tires
N
C Inspect the brake linings.
E Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
necessary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. *
Change the All Wheel Drive power transfer
unit fluid. (See the note at the end of this
chart.)
Change the All Wheel Drive (AWD) overrunning clutch and rear carrier fluid. (See note at
the end of this chart)
Replace the air conditioning filter.
39, 000
(62 000)
X
42, 000
(67 000)
X
X
X
X
45, 000
(72 000)
X
48, 000
(77 000)
X
X
51, 000
(82 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
54, 000
(86 000)
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate Tires
Inspect the brake linings.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if
necessary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. (Front
& Rear)
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary.*
Inspect the serpentine drive belt, replace if
necessary. ‡
Change the automatic transmission fluid and
filter.
57, 000
(91 000)
X
60, 000
(96 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
63, 000
66, 000
69, 000
(101 000) (106 000) (110 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
379 M
72, 000
(115 000)
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 380 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change the All Wheel Drive (AWD) power
A transfer unit fluid. (See note at the end of this
N chart)
C
E Change the All Wheel Drive (AWD) overrunS
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
ning clutch and rear carrier fluid. (See note at
the end of this chart)
Replace the air conditioning filter.
57, 000
(91 000)
60, 000
(96 000)
X
63, 000
66, 000
69, 000
(101 000) (106 000) (110 000)
X
72, 000
(115 000)
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate Tires
Inspect the brake linings.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if
necessary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter
Replace the spark plugs.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. (Front
& Rear)
Check the PCV valve and replace if necessary.
Not required if previously changed.*
Inspect the serpentine drive belt, replace if
necessary. ‡
Change the All Wheel Drive power transfer
unit fluid. (See the note at the end of this
chart.)
75, 000
78, 000
81, 000
84, 000
87, 000
(120 000) (125 000) (130 000) (134 000) (139 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
381 M
90, 000
(144 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 382 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change the All Wheel Drive (AWD) overrunA ning clutch and rear carrier fluid. (See note at
N the end of this chart)
C
E Replace the air conditioning filter.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
75, 000
78, 000
81, 000
84, 000
87, 000
(120 000) (125 000) (130 000) (134 000) (139 000)
X
X
90, 000
(144 000)
SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate Tires
Inspect the brake linings.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if
necessary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter *
Replace engine timing belt.
Change the All Wheel Drive (AWD) power
transfer unit fluid. (See note at the end of this
chart)
Change the All Wheel Drive (AWD) overrunning clutch and rear carrier fluid. (See note at
the end of this chart)
Inspect the serpentine drive belt, replace if
necessary. ‡
93, 000
96, 000
99, 000
100, 000 102, 000
(149 000) (154 000) (158 000) (160 000) (163 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
383 M
105, 000
(168 000)
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
X
M 384 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60
A months or 100,000 miles.
N
C Replace the air conditioning filter.
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
93, 000
96, 000
99, 000
100, 000 102, 000
(149 000) (154 000) (158 000) (160 000) (163 000)
X
X
105, 000
(168 000)
SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate Tires
Inspect the brake linings.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. (Front &
Rear)
Inspect the PCV valve and replace as necessary.*
Inspect the serpentine drive belt, replace if necessary. ‡
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
Change the All Wheel Drive (AWD) power transfer
unit fluid. (See note at the end of this chart)
Replace the air conditioning filter.
108, 000
(173 000)
X
X
X
X
111, 000
(178 000)
X
114, 000
(182 000)
X
X
X
X
117, 000
(187 000)
X
120, 000
(192 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
385 M
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
386
SCHEDULE “B”
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emissions warranty.
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all reS ceipts.
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
NOTE: The AWD power transfer unit fluid and the
AWD overrunning clutch/ rear carrier fluid must be
changed at the more frequent intervals shown in schedule B if the vehicle is operated under any of the conditions noted by a diamond (〫) at the beginning of the
schedule.
SCHEDULE “A”
387 M
SCHEDULE “A”
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate Tires
Inspect the brake linings.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if
necessary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. (Front
& Rear)
Replace the air conditioning filter.
6, 000
(10 000)
[6]
X
X
12, 000
(19 000)
[12]
X
X
X
X
18, 000
(29 000)
[18]
X
X
X
X
24, 000
(38 000 )
[24]
X
X
30, 000
(48 000)
[30]
X
X
X
36, 000
(58 000)
[36]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 388 SCHEDULE “A”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N [Months]
A Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
C Rotate Tires
E Inspect the brake linings.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if
necessary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. (Front
& Rear)
Check the PCV valve and replace, if necessary.*
Inspect the serpentine drive belt, replace if
necessary. ‡
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60
months, regardless of mileage.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
42, 000
(67 000)
[42]
X
X
48, 000
(77 000)
[48]
X
X
X
X
54, 000
(86 000)
[54]
X
X
X
X
60, 000
(96 000)
[60]
X
X
66, 000
72, 000
(106 000) (115 000)
[66]
[72]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “A”
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate Tires
Inspect the brake linings.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. (Front &
Rear)
Check and replace the PCV valve , if necessary.*
Inspect the serpentine drive belt, replace if necessary. ‡
Replace the spark plugs.
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 100,000
miles, if not done at 60 months.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
78, 000
(125 000)
[78]
X
X
84, 000
(134 000)
[84]
X
X
X
X
90, 000
(144 000)
[90]
X
X
X
389 M
96, 000
(154 000)
[96]
X
X
100, 000
(160 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
X
X
X
X
M 390 SCHEDULE “A”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N [Months]
A Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
C Rotate Tires
E Inspect the brake linings.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace engine timing belt.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. (Front & Rear)
Check the PCV valve and replace, if necessary.*
Inspect the serpentine drive belt, replace if necessary. ‡
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months, if not
done at 100,000 miles (160 000 km).
Replace the air conditioning filter.
102, 000
(163 000)
[102]
X
X
X
108, 000
(173 000)
[108]
X
X
X
X
114, 000
(182 000)
[114]
X
X
120, 000
(192 000)
[120]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “A”
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emissions warranty.
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.
391 M
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
䡵 If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
䡵 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
䡵 Mopar威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
9
394
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident,
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items, and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable
to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in
your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
products and services.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
Chrysler, Dodge, or Jeep dealer. We strongly recommend
that you take your vehicle to you selling dealer. They
know you and your vehicle best, and are most concerned
that you get prompt and high quality service. The
manufacturer’s dealers have the facilities, factory-trained
technicians, special tools, and the latest information to
assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely
manner.
This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the dealership. They
want to know if you need assistance.
• If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you
may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.
395
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer
Center should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Dealership name
• Vehicle identification number
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone —(800) 465–2001
9
396
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for your
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehicle
limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about your service
contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
Contract, and you require service after your manufacturer’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to
your contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
397
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See your manufacturer’s Warranty Information Booklet
for information on warranty coverage and transfer of
warranty.
9
398
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
U.S. ONLY
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
MOPAR姞 PARTS
Mopar威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from your dealer. They will help you keep your
vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you
believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, and the
manufacturer.
399
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in Washington DC area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Dept. of
Transportation, Washington DC 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
the Hotline.
In Canada:
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
9
400
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).
• Service Manuals.
These comprehensive service manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge
of the vehicle, system and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams
and charts.
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.
Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,
these practical manuals make it easy for students and
technicians to find and fix problems on computercontrolled vehicle systems and features. They show
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,
using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list
of all tools and equipment.
• Owner’s Manuals.
These manuals have been prepared with the assistance
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and
safety tips.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Call Toll Free at 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.) or 1–800–387–1143
(Canada)
Or
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:
www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com or
www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following describes the tire grading categories established by the National highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s
manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall
of the tires on your car.
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in Addition to These Grades.
401
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1
1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are A, B, and
C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
9
402
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
WARNING!
The traction grade is based on braking (straightahead) traction tests and does not include cornering
(turning) performance.
The temperature grade is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup
and possible tire failure.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
INDEX
10
404
INDEX
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128,339
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223,228
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243,336
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . 223,228,232,335
Air Conditioning System, Zone Control . . . . . . . . 224
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,50,58,69,173
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Airbag, Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
All Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255,281,352
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . 341,342,368
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Anti-Theft Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Arming Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,18
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Automatic Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Reset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
INDEX
Selection Of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349,370
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,253,254
Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Keyless Transmitter Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
405
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258,346
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347,370
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258,346
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 67
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328,329
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
10
406
INDEX
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Cargo Compartment
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Cassette Tape and Player Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 220
Cassette Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193,198
Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Caution, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,339
CD Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189,201,203
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183,187,193,200,203
CD Player Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79,222
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170,323
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,61
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182,183
Compact Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Coolant Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
INDEX
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341,344
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Selection of Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341,368,369
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,358
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,228,239
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
407
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Digital Video Disc Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Disarming, Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Drive Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Drive Shaft Universal Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
10
408
INDEX
DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Electronic Vehicle Information Center . . . . . . . . . 174
Emergency, In Case of
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 323,372
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320,321
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320,321
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30,290
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287,368
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326,368,369
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328,329
Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328,368
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30,68,290,340
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
INDEX
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243,336
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330,369
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166,366,367
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347,370
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336,370
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
409
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124,171,366
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287,369
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287,368
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
10
410
INDEX
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Gas Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290,323
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15,23,284
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Grocery Bag Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Hands-Free Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Head Phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . 125
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Homelink Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345,349
INDEX
Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Indicator, Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163,164,165
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121,122
Intermittent Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302,306
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
411
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Key, Programming . .
Key, Replacement . .
Key, Sentry . . . . . . .
Key-In Reminder . . .
Keyless Entry System
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . .
Knee Bolster . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
14
14
12
12
20
11
49
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,61
Latches
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,120
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,58,69,173
10
412
INDEX
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363,364
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124,171,366
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122,364,365
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Liftgate Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363,364
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 170
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122,125,366,367
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 165
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292,293
INDEX
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Locks
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,61
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Luggage Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Maintenance, Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Schedule ⬙A⬙ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Schedule ⬙B⬙ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Maintenance, Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Malfunction Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170,323
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
413
Memory Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,116
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325,399
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
10
414
INDEX
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Octane Rating, Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326,369
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330,369
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328,368
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328,329,368
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322,323
Opener, Garage Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Operator Manuals (Owner’s Manuals) . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Overhead Travel Information Center . . . . . . . . . . 137
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165,301
Owner’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,400
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Parking On Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Phone, Hands-Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 269
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
INDEX
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102,103
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Steering, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . 139,144,176
Programming Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . 22,139,144
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . 341,343
Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194,222
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,218
415
Radio, Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183,193
Rear Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Rear Seating Flexibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298,314
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Remote Sound System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279,281
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
10
416
INDEX
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,65
Restraints, Infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 38
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102,103
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
INDEX
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Selection of Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341,369
Sentry Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . 170
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182,183
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166,366,367
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276,277,304
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
417
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Steering
Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261,336
Shaft Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151,362
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242,362
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Sunglass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 44
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
10
418
INDEX
System, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Temperature Control, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 165,301
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,61
Theft Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Theft System Arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Theft System Disarming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . 268,269
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,272,401
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268,269
Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279,281
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263,272
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
INDEX
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298,314
Trailering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130,168,262
Traction Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130,262
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,253,254
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Selection of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349,370
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
419
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Transmitter Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Trip Odometer Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125,166,366,367
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . .
Universal Joints . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . .
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . .
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
10
420
INDEX
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269,292,293
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242,362
Vehicle Theft Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Video Entertainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . 165
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128,339
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Wheel Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31,148
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126,339
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Wiper, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Zone Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Download PDF

advertising